JP7210412B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player.

In game machines such as slot machines and pachinko machines that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot) that is advantageous to the player, there are some that can execute a suggestive effect that suggests the possibility of being controlled to an advantageous state. .

In this type of game machine, there is a game machine capable of executing a multi-stage ready-to-win effect as a suggestive effect, in which the possibility of being controlled to an advantageous state increases as the game progresses (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-348951 A

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, if the ready-to-win effect develops, the possibility of being controlled to an advantageous state increases. There was a problem that it was not possible to increase it suitably.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably increasing the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state.

The game machine according to claim 1,
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect of displaying a predetermined image and outputting a sound of a predetermined volume;
a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect that makes the predetermined image difficult to see;
an information display effect executing means capable of executing an information display effect suggesting that the information is controlled to the advantageous state by displaying the information during the variable display of 1 and after the special effect;
with
The information display effect is
a first information display effect for displaying first information composed of a first number of information;
a second information display effect that can be executed after the first information display effect and displays second information composed of a second number of information different from the first number;
including
The first information and the second information are information that is not displayed during a period from the start of the variable display to the execution of the special effect during the variable display, and the second information is the information that is the second information. Information that is not displayed during the display of 1 information,
The information display effect executing means
The second information can be displayed in a display mode with a higher degree of emphasis than the display mode of the first information,
The first information can be divided into a plurality of pieces of information and displayed sequentially in the first information display effect, and the second information can be divided into a plurality of pieces of information and displayed sequentially in the second information display effect,
the second number is less than the first number;
a mode of erasing the first information when ending the display of the first information in the first information display effect; and a mode of erasing the first information when ending the display of the second information in the second information display effect. Different from the erasing mode when erasing the second information,
It is characterized by
In addition, the game machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect of displaying a predetermined image and outputting a sound of a predetermined volume;
a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect that makes the predetermined image difficult to see;
an information display effect executing means capable of executing an information display effect suggesting that information is displayed so as to be controlled to the advantageous state after the special effect;
with
The information display effect is
a first information display effect for displaying first information composed of a first number of information;
a second information display effect that can be executed after the first information display effect and displays second information composed of a second number of information different from the first number;
including
The information display effect executing means
The second information can be displayed in a display mode with a higher degree of emphasis than the display mode of the first information,
The first information can be divided into a plurality of pieces of information and displayed sequentially in the first information display effect, and the second information can be divided into a plurality of pieces of information and displayed sequentially in the second information display effect,
The second number is less than the first number.
According to these features, the second information has a smaller amount of information than the first information and is displayed in an emphasized manner. can be improved to

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention together with the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It may have.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which illustrates a production|presentation control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is an explanatory view showing a display result determination table, a big hit type determination table, a small hit type determination table, and a big hit type. It is explanatory drawing which shows the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the data holding area for production|presentation control, and a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flow chart which shows start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart showing a winning random number value determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a variation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart which shows special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows small hit opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows processing during small hit opening. It is a flow chart which shows small hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variable display of the 2nd special design in the time saving state after the jackpot game completion of the jackpot A and the jackpot game of the jackpot B in a normal state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variable display of the 2nd special design in the time saving state after the jackpot game completion of the jackpot C and jackpot D in a normal state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variable display of the 2nd special design in the time saving state after the jackpot game completion of the jackpot E, and a normal state. It is a flowchart which shows normal design process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of a normal design, and the release pattern of a normal electric accessory. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symbol fixing period and the opening and closing period of the normal electric accessory. It is a flow chart which shows a part of production|presentation control process processing. 10 is a flowchart showing panel display effect processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a display pattern determination ratio of panel display effects and each display pattern; 9 is a flowchart showing result image display processing; 9 is a flowchart showing background image update processing; 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start processing; It is a timing chart in the variable display of the second special symbol in the case of being controlled to the time saving state after the jackpot D jackpot game is finished. It is a timing chart in the variable display of the second special symbol in the case of being controlled to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot E jackpot game. 9 is a flow chart showing an advance notice effect determination process; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the effect pattern determination ratio of the advance notice effect and each effect pattern; It is a flow chart which shows ending production processing. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus at the time of the jackpot game completion. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the time saving state after the jackpot game of jackpot A is complete|finished. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the time saving state after the jackpot game of jackpot B is complete|finished. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the time saving state after the big-hit game of the big-hit D and the big-hit E ends. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing suggestive effect determination processing during rear variable display in modification 239SG-1; FIG. It is a diagram showing the production patterns of the determination ratio of the production to be executed as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display and the effect pattern of the big hit suggestive effect and the setting suggestive effect to be executed as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display in the modified example 239SG-1. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of a big hit suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of setting suggestion production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing suggestive effect determination processing during front variable display; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the performance to be executed as the front variable display suggesting performance when execution of the big hit suggesting performance is determined, and (B) is a diagram showing the execution of the set suggesting performance is determined. (C) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of effects to be executed as suggestive effects during variable front display in the case, and (C) is a diagram showing effect patterns of character effects and timer effects executed as suggestive effects during variable front display, (D) is a diagram showing the degree of expectation for a big hit of the character effect and the timer effect and the degree of execution expectation of the setting suggestion effect. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the character effect, (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the timer effect, and (C) shows the content of each effect pattern of the timer effect. It is a diagram. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution period in variable display of super reach. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; (A) is a diagram showing an announcement effect determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the details of the announcement effect. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the advance notice effect. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing the structure of effects of super reach α1, α2, β1 and β2. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of super reach α1. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of super reach β2. (A) is a diagram comparing the contents of the front-stage production and the rear-stage production, and (B) is a timing chart showing the display state of lines. (A) is a timing chart showing changes in display, sound, and light output levels in normal reach, and (B) is a diagram showing content of reach titles. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the front stage effect and the rear stage effect. (A) is a diagram showing a change mode in the switching effect, (B) is a diagram comparing the notice effect and the switching effect, and (C) is a diagram comparing the display period of the notice effect and the switching effect. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the switching effect. (I) to (L) are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the switching effect. (A) and (B) are timing charts showing an example of the effect operation of super reach in the characteristic part 175SG modified example 1. FIG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing example 1 of special effect, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing example 2 of special effect. (A) to (H) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of super reach as a modified example. Similarly, (I) to (L) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a super reach effect operation as a modified example.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(Characteristic part 239SG form)
The game machine of form 1 is
A variable display is performed based on the fulfillment of the execution condition (for example, the game ball wins the first starting prize opening or the second starting prize opening), and when the variable display result becomes a predetermined result (for example, a small hit). Control to a predetermined game state (for example, small winning game state), and an advantageous state (for example, A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) controlled to a jackpot game state),
Game control means (for example, CPU 103 can control the game state after the end of the advantageous state to a special state (for example, time saving state) in which the execution condition is more likely to be established than in the normal state (for example, the jackpot end processing shown in FIGS. 10-17) ) and
Display means (for example, a panel of characters A to D as shown in FIG. 10-36(C)) that can display a plurality of types of special displays related to variable display when controlled to the special state (for example, an image display device 5);
with
The display means provides, as the special display, a first special display corresponding to one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. A panel of characters A to C corresponding to a time-saving state for variable display of patterns) and a second special display corresponding to multiple variable displays (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-37 (B), A panel of character D corresponding to the time-saving state for variable display of the second special pattern three times after the jackpot game of jackpot B is finished (panel corresponding to character D for the time-saving state after the jackpot game of jackpot B is finished)) can be displayed.
According to this feature, different special displays are displayed according to the number of variable displays executed in the special state, so that the interest in the special state can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 2 is the gaming machine according to form 1,
A first pattern (for example, when the variable display result is a In the case of a small hit, the game ball passes through the third count switch 239SG024B during the small win game to control the big win game state), and when the variable display result becomes a specific result, a predetermined A second pattern that controls to an advantageous state without being controlled to a game state (for example, a portion that is controlled to a big win game state without being controlled to a small win game state when the variable display result is a big win), has
The game control means is
As the special state, a first special state in which the special state ends when the special state is executed once (for example, one variable display of the second special symbol after the jackpot game A is finished) is targeted. and a second special state in which the special state is terminated by executing the variable display a plurality of times (for example, the variable display of the second special symbol three times after the jackpot B is finished). time-saving state) and can be controlled to
Even in the advantageous state by the second pattern, it is possible to control the second special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-6, in the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display result is a big hit, and the big hit type is a big hit By being B, the portion controlled to the time saving state for variable display of the second special symbol three times after the end of the jackpot game of the jackpot B),
The display means can display the second special display even in the second special state controlled after the advantageous state of the second pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-37, the jackpot B jackpot Part where a character D corresponding panel corresponding to the time saving state after the big win B is finished is displayed on the image display device 5 in the time saving state for variable display of the second special pattern three times after the game is finished)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the interest of the special state after the advantageous state by the second pattern can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 3 is the gaming machine according to form 1 or form 2,
The game control means, as the special state, a first special state in which the special state is terminated by executing the variable display once (for example, a second special symbol once after the jackpot game A is finished) ), and a second special state in which the special state ends when the variable display is executed multiple times (for example, the second special three times after the jackpot B jackpot game ends) Time-saving state for variable display of patterns) and can be controlled,
The display means can display the first special display and the second special display when controlled to the first special state (for example, as shown in FIG. The part where the panels of characters A to D can be displayed in the panel display effect in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game),
When the second special display is displayed by being controlled to the first special state, the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the first special display is displayed (for example, shown in FIG. 10-26 Thus, when the character D is displayed as the panel display effect in the time saving state for the variable display of the second special symbol once after the jackpot game of the jackpot A is finished, the character A to the character are displayed as the panel display effect. The part where the ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit is set higher than when C is displayed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to improve interest when the second special display is displayed.

The gaming machine of form 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 3,
Specific effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute the specific effect in the special state in a plurality of different modes executes the panel display effect process and the second mode corresponding effect process as shown in FIG. 10-24. part) and
When the first controlled advantageous state ends after passing through a predetermined game state from the normal state, selection effect execution means (for example, FIGS. 10-34 and FIG. As shown in 10-35, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect mode determination process during the ending effect after the end of the big win game of the big win A or the big win B, thereby changing the effect mode from the first mode to the first mode by the operation of the player. a part that can be selected from 2 modes);
with
The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect in the mode selected by the selected effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-25, if the effect mode is set to the first mode, the panel display effect , and if the effect mode is set to the second mode, a portion that executes a second mode corresponding effect that is different from the panel display effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the player can select the effect mode of the specific effect, the interest of the specific effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 4,
When the second special display is displayed on the display means, a special effect executing means (for example, a panel display effect shown in FIG. 10-24 by a special effect executing means (for example, a panel display effect shown in FIG. the part that executes the processing),
The game control means, as the special state, a first special state in which the special state is terminated by executing the variable display once (for example, a second special symbol once after the jackpot game A is finished) ), and a second special state in which the special state ends when the variable display is executed multiple times (for example, the second special three times after the jackpot B jackpot game ends) Time-saving state for variable display of patterns) and can be controlled,
In the special effect, a plurality of times of effects corresponding to each of the plurality of times of variable display in the second special state relating to the second special display, and whether or not the predetermined result is obtained for each of the variable displays. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a success/failure effect (for example, a success/failure notification effect shown in FIG. 10-37) that indicates the success or failure of the game.
According to this feature, the interest in the second special state can be further improved.

The gaming machine of form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 5,
At least in the normal state, a related effect for displaying a related display (for example, an image of character D) related to the second special display on the display means, and a non-related display (for example, FIG. 10) not related to the second special display. -As shown in 33 (B), the display of lines such as "Chance!", "Hot!", "Extremely Hot!" , a portion for executing the effect processing during variable display after the effect control CPU 120 executes the notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-32),
The effect executing means can execute the related effect at a higher rate than the non-related effect when being controlled to at least one of a predetermined game state and an advantageous state (for example, shown in FIG. 10-33). As shown, when the image of the character D is displayed on the image display device 5 as the advance notice effect, the rate is variable at a higher rate than when the lines such as "chance!", "hot!" The part where the display result is a big hit)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to further improve interest when the second special display is displayed.

(Characteristic part 175SG form)
The game machine of form 1-1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect of displaying a predetermined image and outputting a sound of a predetermined volume (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a normal reach effect in super reach α1, α2, β1, β2) When,
a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect that makes the predetermined image difficult to see (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute a shutter effect or a blackout effect);
Information display effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the front stage effect and the rear stage effect) that can execute the information display effect suggesting that the information is controlled to the advantageous state after the special effect part) and
with
The information display effect is
a first information display effect (for example, front stage effect) for displaying first information composed of a first number of information;
a second information display effect (for example, latter stage effect) that can be executed after the first information display effect and displays second information composed of a second number of information different from the first number;
including
The information display effect executing means
The second information can be displayed in a display mode with a higher degree of emphasis than the display mode of the first information (for example, a display mode in which dialogue in the latter stage effect is emphasized more than in the display mode of the dialogue in the previous stage effect). is displayed in (See Fig. 11-8 (A))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to gradually increase the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state by the information display effect.

The gaming machine of form 1-2 is the gaming machine according to form 1-1,
The information display effect executing means is capable of dividing the first information into a plurality of pieces of information and sequentially displaying them in the first information display effect, and dividing the second information into a plurality of pieces of information in the second information display effect. can be displayed sequentially (see Figures 11-8 (A) and (B))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to gradually increase the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state by the information display effect.

The gaming machine of form 1-3 is the gaming machine according to form 1-2,
The second number is smaller than the first number. more than the number of characters displayed in .)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the second information has a smaller amount of information than the first information and is displayed in an emphasized manner. can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 1-4 is the gaming machine according to form 1-3,
The number displayed as the second information in one period in the second information display effect is smaller than the number displayed as the first information in one period in the first information display effect (for example, each supermarket Reaches α1, α2, β1, and β2 are such that the number of characters displayed in the first period th1 is greater than the number of characters displayed in the first predetermined period th3, and the number of characters displayed in the second period th2 is 2 more than the number of characters displayed in the predetermined period th4.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the second information has a smaller amount of information than the first information and is displayed in an emphasized manner. can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 1-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-4,
A mode (for example, fade-out mode) when the display of the first information is finished in the first information display effect, and a mode when the display of the second information is finished in the second information display effect (for example, a frame It is characterized by being different from the out mode).
According to this feature, the first information and the second information end in different modes, so that the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state by the information display effect can be improved step by step.

The gaming machine of form 1-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-5,
A mode when the display of the first information is started in the first information display effect (for example, a fade-in mode), and a mode when the display of the second information is started in the second information display effect (for example, It is characterized by being different from the frame-in mode).
According to this feature, since the first information and the second information start to be displayed in different modes, it is possible to gradually increase the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state by the information display effect.

The gaming machine of form 1-7 is the gaming machine according to form 1-6,
After the first information display effect and before starting the second information display effect, a special effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a special effect of switching and displaying a plurality of types of specific images. However, the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 (specific images) corresponding to a plurality of types of characters A to C can be switched and displayed).
According to this feature, by executing a special effect of switching and displaying the specific image before transitioning from the first information display effect to the second information display effect, it is possible to control to an advantageous state by the information display effect. You can gradually increase your expectations.

The gaming machine of form 1-8 is the gaming machine according to form 1-7,
The specific image is a character image (for example, character images 175SG001 to 175SG003).
According to this feature, interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 1-9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-8,
A specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute super reach effects A to D),
After the second information display effect, a notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that the specific effect is to be executed (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute reach title effects A to D) When,
It is characterized by having
According to this feature, it is possible to heighten expectations for the specific performance.

The gaming machine of form 1-10 is the gaming machine according to form 1-9,
The execution period of the notification effect is shorter than at least one of the display period of the first information in the first information display effect and the display period of the second information in the second information display effect (for example, The execution periods td1 to td4 of the reach title effect are shorter than the execution period tb1 of the preceding stage effect and the execution period tc1 of the latter stage effect (see FIG. 11-5).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the notification effect from becoming redundant while increasing the expectation for the specific effect.

The gaming machine of form 1-11 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-10,
The information display effect executing means can dynamically display at least one of the first information and the second information (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display a plurality of character images 175SG008 consisting of one character (for example, , "mi", "la", "ku", and "ru") are displayed (dynamically displayed in the frame) so as to rotate from the right side of the display screen toward the center in the first predetermined period th3. ), etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the presentation effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 1-12 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-11,
The information display effect executing means outputs at least one of a sound output and a light output at a first output amount in the first information display effect, and outputs at least one of the sound output and the light output in the second information display effect. Output with a second output amount higher than the first output amount (for example, the production control CPU 120 makes the output level of display, sound, and light higher in the latter stage production than in the former stage production. Fig. 11-9 (A) reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the information display effect can be enhanced step by step.

The game machine of form 2-1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect of displaying a predetermined image and outputting a sound of a predetermined volume (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a normal reach effect in super reach α1, α2, β1, β2) When,
a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect that makes the predetermined image difficult to see (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute a shutter effect or a blackout effect);
A first specific effect (for example, super ready-to-win effects A and B) that can be executed after the special effect and suggests that the control is in the advantageous state, and the above than when the first specific effect is executed A second specific effect (for example, super reach effects C, D) that suggests that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is high, and a specific effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 super reach effects A ~ a part that can execute D);
In the case of executing the second specific effect, a special notification effect can be executed for notifying that the second specific effect is to be executed after the special effect and before starting the second specific effect. Special notification effect execution means (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the switching effect),
Suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting control to the advantageous state by switching and displaying a plurality of types of suggestive images (for example, effect control CPU 120 can execute advance notice effects A to C) part) and
with
In a predetermined period after executing the special effect, the sound output is lowered below the predetermined volume (for example, after the effect control CPU 120 starts the shutter effect or the blackout effect, the output level of the display, sound, and light is reduced. The portion to be lowered (see Fig. 11-9 (A)),
The special notification effect execution means notifies that the second specific effect is executed by switching and displaying a plurality of types of specific images (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 is super reach β1, β2, switching part that executes the production)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the second specific effect is executed, the specific image is switched and displayed after a predetermined period of time during which the specific image is made invisible by the special effect and the output of sound and light is suppressed. By executing the special notification effect, it is possible to step-by-step increase expectations for being controlled in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 2-2 is the gaming machine according to form 2-1,
In the special notification effect, the period from when one specific image is displayed to when it is switched to another specific image (for example, the display period tg1) is the period after the one suggestive image is displayed in the suggestive effect. Shorter than the period (for example, display period tf1) until the display is switched to another suggestive image (see FIG. 11-11(C))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the second specific effect is executed, the specific image is displayed rather than the suggestive effect after a predetermined period of time during which the predetermined image is made invisible by the special effect and the output of sound and light is suppressed. By executing the special notification effect that is quickly switched and displayed, it is possible to gradually increase the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 2-3 is the gaming machine according to form 2-1 or form 2-2,
The special notification effect executing means can switch and display the specific image that is larger than the suggestive image (see FIG. 11-11(B)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by executing the special notification effect of switching and displaying the specific image that is larger than the predetermined image, it is possible to gradually increase the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 2-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-3,
The special production execution means is
A first special effect (e.g., shutter effect) in which the sound output is reduced below the predetermined volume in the first period, and a second special effect in which the sound output is reduced below the predetermined volume during the second period longer than the first period. Effect (for example, blackout effect) and,
The second special effect is executed before the specific effect is executed (see FIG. 11-5).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the period in which the output of sound and light is suppressed by making the predetermined image difficult to see due to the special effect may be short or long, and the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is suitable. can be improved to

The gaming machine of form 2-5 is the gaming machine according to form 2-4,
The ratio of control to the advantageous state differs between when the first special effect is executed and when the second special effect is executed (for example, super reach β1 and β2 where the blackout effect is executed is , Expectations for big hits are higher than super reach α1 and α2 where shutter effects are executed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the period during which the output of sound or light is suppressed.

The gaming machine of form 2-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-5,
The plurality of types of specific images include at least a first specific image and a second specific image similar in form to the first specific image (for example, a small image, a medium image, and a large image, see FIG. 11-13(I). ~ see (L))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, one specific image is changed by the switching display, so the production effect is improved.

The gaming machine of form 2-7 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-6,
The special notification effect executing means is capable of changing the display mode of at least one of the one specific image and the other specific image in a plurality of stages,
A start stage image (for example, blank image 175SG010) displayed at the start stage of the plurality of stages, an end stage image (for example, each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003 large image) displayed at the end stage, the start stage and the Intermediate stage images (for example, small images and medium images of each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003) when displayed in the intermediate stage of the end stage,
The display mode of the start stage image and the end stage image is different from the display mode of the intermediate stage image (for example, the blank image 175SG010 and the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 are displayed in blue, and the character images 175SG001 and 175SG001 are displayed in blue. Small and medium images of ~175SG003 are displayed in gold)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easy to understand the change of the specific image and the switching of the type.

The gaming machine of form 2-8 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-7,
The execution period of the first specific effect is shorter than the execution period of the second specific effect (for example, the execution periods te3 and te4 of the super reach effects C and D corresponding to the super reach β1 and β2 are shorter than the super It is set longer than the execution periods te1 and te2 of the super reach effects A and B corresponding to the reach α1 and α2 (te1=te2<te3=te4)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the first specific effect from becoming redundant even though the special notification effect is not executed.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3). Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main board 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 50Aa and long pieces 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability-high base state, a high-probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and a normal state is also called a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17 , and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an alternating current power supply such as AC 100 V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is switched to the power supply board 17 . It can be supplied to electrical parts including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main substrate 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is performed, and then the setting change process (step S7) is performed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop-display a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. Figure 7 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variation special figure is the first special figure, and Figure 7 (B) shows that the variation special figure is the second special figure It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display assigned to the result. Thereby, when it is a high probability state such as a probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability that it is determined to control to a big hit game state is higher than when it is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. get higher

In the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is determined to be the same value. has been assigned a value. In the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure display result Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the determination table. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" may be changed. The probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variation special figure may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment value is set regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to set value 6 are set. In this case, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to the "jackpot", only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 in the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called one-type two-type mixed type) that controls a big hit game state based on the passage of a ball through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving the command specifying the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 239SG)
Next, the pachinko game machine 1 of the characterizing portion 239SG in the present embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 10-1 to 10-38. In addition, in the description of each step of the flow chart in the characteristic part 239SG, for example, the part described as "step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "239SGS1", and "normal reach" is abbreviated as "N reach" or "super reach". is sometimes abbreviated as “SP reach”. In addition, the configuration having the same function as that of the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description or having a different form, arrangement position, etc., will be omitted from detailed description by attaching the same reference numerals. In the following, the front side of FIG. 10-1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear) side. The direction will be used as a reference. Incidentally, the front face of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is the facing face facing the player who plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

In the display area of the image display device 5, a first reserved memory display area 239SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 239SG005U are arranged. In the first reserved memory display area 239SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 239SG005U, a reserved memory display is performed to identifiably display the reserved number of variable display corresponding to each special symbol (special figure reserved memory number). Here, the suspension of the variable display corresponding to each special symbol is that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. ) based on starting winnings by That is, although the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is satisfied, the variable display based on the previously satisfied start condition is being executed, and the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to a jackpot game state, etc., when the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display is not established, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is held. The reserved memory display in the first reserved memory display area 239SG005D is a reserved memory display generated based on the start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, and in the second reserved memory display area 239SG005U The pending memory display is a pending memory display generated based on the starting winning by the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening.

In this characteristic portion 239SG, the suspension memory display generated based on the start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening is displayed in round white (displayed in the first suspension memory display area 239SG005D Suspended memory display), and the suspended memory display generated based on the start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening is displayed in round white (displayed in the second retention memory display area 239SG005U Reservation memory display). In addition, based on the holding memory display generated based on the starting winning by the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, and the starting winning by the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening The display mode of the pending memory display generated by the event may be a different display mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-1, along with the first reserved memory display area 239SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 239SG005U, at the top of the first special design display device 4A and the second special design display device 4B, the number of special design reservation storage are provided with a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B for identifiably displaying. The first reservation display 25A displays the number of first special figure reservation storage so as to be identifiable. The second reservation display 25B displays the number of second special figure reservation storage so as to be identifiable. The number of first special figure pending storage is the number of memories in which execution of variable display using the first special figure is suspended. The number of second special figure pending storage is the number of memories in which the execution of the variable display using the second special figure is suspended. The number of reserved memories of the variable display obtained by adding the number of first special figure reserved memories and the number of second special figure reserved memories is also called the total number of reserved memories. When simply referring to the "special figure reserved memory number", it usually refers to the concept including all of the first special figure reserved memory number, the second special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number, but in particular, some of these (for example A concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total number of reserved memory).

A special variable winning ball unit 239SG007 in which a first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A and a second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B are integrated is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B.

Here, the configuration of the special variable winning ball unit 239SG007 will be described. In the following description, the vertical and horizontal directions when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front are used as a reference.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, the special variable winning ball unit 239SG007 has a first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A on the left side and a second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B on the right side. In addition, a cover body (not shown) made of a translucent synthetic resin material is attached to the front side of the special variable winning ball unit 239SG007, and the player can touch the special variable winning ball unit through the cover body. 239SG007, especially the game ball flowing down in the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B can be visually recognized.

The first special variable prize winning ball device 239SG007A includes a first large prize winning opening door 239SG701 that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 239SG082 (see FIG. 10-2). A changing first big prize opening is formed. The first big winning hole is formed to open upward on the left side of the special variable winning ball unit 239SG007. In addition, the first big prize winning opening door 239SG701 can be slid forward and backward between a closing position for closing the first big winning opening and an open position for opening the first big winning opening by driving the solenoid 239SG082. ing.

In the first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A, when the solenoid 239SG082 is in the ON state, the first big winning gate door 239SG701 opens the first big winning gate, and the game ball passes through (enters) the first big winning gate. make it easier. On the other hand, when the solenoid 239SG082 is in the OFF state, the first large winning opening door 239SG701 closes the first large winning opening, preventing the game ball from passing through (entering) the first large winning opening. In this way, the first big winning hole changes between an open state that is advantageous for the player through which game balls can easily pass (enter) and a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player because game balls cannot pass through (enter). Instead of the closed state in which the game balls cannot pass through (enter) the first large prize winning port, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game balls are difficult to pass through (enter) the first large prize winning port is provided. may

The game ball that has passed through (entered) the first big prize hole passes through the first count switch 239SG023 (see FIG. 10-2) provided in the first big prize hole, and is detected by the first count switch 239SG023. be done. A game ball that has passed through the first count switch 239SG023 is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2 . Based on the game balls being detected by the first count switch 239SG023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes through (enters) the first large winning hole that is in the open state in the first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A, other winning holes such as the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter). Therefore, when the first special winning ball device 239SG007A opens the first big winning hole, the game ball can enter the first big winning hole, and the first state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the first special winning ball device 239SG007A closes the first big winning hole, it is impossible or difficult to get a game ball through (enter) the first big winning hole. , resulting in a second state that is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, most of the game balls that do not enter the first big winning hole are guided to the variable winning ball device 6B by an obstruction nail or the like (not shown), and if the variable winning ball device 6B is in the expanded and opened state, the second starting is performed. It is designed to win the prize.

The second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B is formed to protrude upward from the first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A, and is a second big winning opening that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 239SG083 (see FIG. 10-2). A door 239SG711 is provided, and a second large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state is formed by the second large winning opening door 239SG711. The second big winning hole is formed to open upward at the upper end of the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B. The second large prize winning port door 239SG711 operates between a first state (open state) in which the second large prize winning port is opened by driving the solenoid 239SG083 and a second state (closed state) in which the second large prize winning port is closed. It is provided so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction.

In the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B, when the solenoid 239SG083 for the second large winning opening door 239SG711 is in the ON state, the second large winning opening door 239SG711 opens the second large winning opening, and the game ball moves to the second Make it easier to pass through (enter) the second prize-winning opening. On the other hand, when the solenoid 239SG083 for the second large winning opening door 239SG711 is in the OFF state, the second large winning opening door 239SG711 closes the second large winning opening, and the game ball passes through the second large winning opening. (enter) to make it impossible. In this way, the second big winning hole changes between an open state in which game balls can easily pass (enter) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which game balls cannot pass (enter) and is disadvantageous to the player. Instead of the closed state in which game balls cannot pass (enter) the second large prize-winning port, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which game balls are difficult to pass through (enter) the second large prize-winning port is provided. may

A game ball passing through (entering) the second big winning hole passes through the second count switch 239SG024A installed in the second big winning hole and is detected by the second count switch 239SG024A. Based on the game balls being detected by the second count switch 239SG024A, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes through (enters) the second large winning opening that is in the open state in the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B, other normal winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening More prize balls are paid out than when game balls pass (enter) the mouth. Therefore, when the second special winning ball device 239SG007B opens the second big winning hole, the game ball can enter the second big winning hole, and the first state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the second special winning ball device 239SG007B closes the second big winning hole, it is impossible or difficult to get a game ball through (enter) the second big winning hole. , resulting in a second state that is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, a game ball flow path is formed in the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B, through which game balls that have passed through the second big winning hole can flow down. A third count switch 239SG024B capable of further detecting a game ball that has passed through the second count switch 239SG024A is installed in the game ball flow path. A game ball that has passed through the third count switch 239SG024B is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2 . Also, the game ball that has reached the most downstream part of the branch path 741 is guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2, and passes through the fourth count switch 24C. , is detected by the fourth counting switch 24C.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 239SG, based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the third count switch 239SG024B during the small winning game described later, the game state after the small winning game is finished is controlled to the big winning game state. there is

In addition, the passage gate 41 in the characteristic part 239SG is installed between the first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A and the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B in the special variable winning ball unit 239SG007.

In this characterizing portion 239SG, the game area is divided into a left game area on the left side of a center decorative frame surrounding the image display device 5 arranged substantially in the center of the game area and a right game area on the right side. A game ball hit weakly by the hitting operation handle (left hit) flows down the left game area, and a game ball hit hard by the hitting operation handle (right hit) flows down the right game area. ing.

In addition, the game ball that has flowed down the left game area can win the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the game ball that has flowed down the right game region can be the variable winning ball device 6B and the first special variable winning ball device. 239SG007A and the second special variable prize winning ball device 239SG007B are provided with a large number of obstacle nails so that they can win prizes and pass through the passage gate 41 . That is, in the case of left-handed hitting, the first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A and the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B cannot win a prize and cannot pass through the passage gate 41 .

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 will be schematically described.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the normal symbol display device 20 normally variably displays the symbols such that the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 10-2. After the normal pattern start condition for execution is established, for example, the previous variable display of the normal pattern has ended, based on the establishment of the normal pattern start condition for starting the variable display of the normal pattern, normally Variable display of the general pattern by the pattern display 20 is started.

In this variable display of the normal pattern, after the start of the variation of the normal pattern, when a predetermined time as the variable display time of the normal pattern elapses, the fixed normal pattern that is the result of the variable display of the normal pattern is stopped and displayed (derived display). . At this time, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern hit pattern) such as a number indicating "7" is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the variable display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern hit". On the other hand, if a normal pattern other than a normal pattern per pattern, such as a number or symbol other than a number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a fixed normal pattern, the variable display result of the normal pattern will be "normal pattern lost". Become. In response to the fact that the variable display result of the normal pattern is "normal pattern hit", expansion opening control (tilting control) is performed so that the movable wing pieces of the electric tulip constituting the variable winning ball device 6B are at the tilting position. , normal open control is performed to return to the vertical position after a predetermined time has elapsed.

After the first start condition is satisfied, such as when the game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting hole switch 22A shown in FIG. 10-2, For example, the first special symbol display device 4A starts to variably display the special symbols when the first start condition is met, such as when the previous special symbol game or the big hit game state is completed. In addition, the second start condition is established by detecting the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B by the second starting hole switch 22B shown in FIG. 10-2. After that, the second special symbol display device 4B starts the variable display of the special symbols based on the establishment of the second start condition, for example, by the end of the previous variable display of the special symbols or the end of the big hit game state. .

In the variable display of the special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, after starting the variable display of the special symbols, when the variable display time as the special symbol variable display time elapses, the special symbols Derivation and display of a fixed special symbol (variable display result) that is a variable display result of. At this time, if a specific special pattern (big hit pattern) is stop-displayed as a fixed special pattern, it becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, and a predetermined special pattern (small-hit pattern) different from the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed. If so, it becomes a "minor win" as a predetermined display result. Also, if a special symbol different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes "lost".

After the variable display result in the variable display of the special figure becomes "big hit", it is controlled to a big hit game state as a specific game state in which a round advantageous to the player (also called "round game") is executed a predetermined number of times. be. After the variable display result in the variable display of the special figure becomes "small hit", it is controlled to a small win game state as a special game state different from the big win game state.

In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 239SG, as an example, the special symbols representing the numbers ``3'', ``5'' and ``7'' are used as the big winning symbols, and the special symbols indicating the number ``2'' are used as the small winning symbols. , and a special symbol indicating a sign of "-" is used as a missing symbol. In addition, each symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, and a losing symbol in the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is a special symbol different from each symbol in the variable display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. You may make it become a design, and in the variable display of both special symbols, a common special design may become a big-hit design, a small-hit design, or a losing design.

After the big win pattern is stopped and displayed as the fixed special pattern in the variable display of the special symbols and becomes "big hit" as the specific display result, in the big win game state, the first big winning entrance door of the first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A. The 230SG701 opens the first big winning hole until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are produced. As a result, a round is executed in which the first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A is placed in the first state (open state) advantageous to the player.

The round, which is the opening cycle of the first big winning slot, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" or "10"). In addition, even before the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of times, the execution of the round is terminated by the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the game ball did not win the first prize winning opening). good too.

In addition, after the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the variable display of special symbols and becomes a "small winning" as a specific display result, in the small winning game state, the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B The 2nd prize winning opening door 239SG711 opens the second prize winning opening during a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number of winning balls (for example, 10) are generated. state. As a result, the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B enters the first state (open state) advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 239SG, the second big winning opening door 239SG711 is set to be opened once in the small winning game state until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses. , and may be opened multiple times in the small winning game state.

In the small winning game state, when the game ball that has won the second big winning hole passes through the third count switch 239SG024B provided in the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B, the game ball passes through the third count switch 239SG024B. It becomes a "jackpot" based on (V prize jackpot). That is, the CPU 103 controls the game state to the jackpot game state based on the detection of passage of the game ball through the third count switch 239SG024B.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 239SG, the game ball that has won the second big prize opening always passes through the third count switch 239SG024B. In other words, when the game ball enters the second big winning hole in the small winning game state, the winning game ball is always detected by the third count switch 239SG024B, and after the small winning game ends, the CPU 103 controls the game ball to the big winning game state. be done. In addition, in this characteristic part 239SG, when the variable display result is a small hit, the game ball enters the second big winning hole during the small win game, so that the big win game state is always controlled after the small win game is finished. It is designed to be

Then, when the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state based on the passage of the third count switch 239SG024B, the second special winning ball device 239SG007B second big winning opening door 239SG711 is closed for a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds ) or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated, the second big winning hole is opened. As a result, a round game is executed in which the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B is placed in the first state (open state) advantageous to the player. In addition, in the present characteristic portion 239SG, when the jackpot game state is controlled based on the passage of the third count switch 239SG024B, the second special variable winning ball device 239SG007B is controlled to the first state. The present invention is not limited to this, and the first special variable winning ball device 239SG007A may be controlled to the first state.

The round game, which is the opening cycle of the second big winning slot, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "9"). It should be noted that even before the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit number of times, even if the round game is terminated due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the game ball did not enter the second big winning hole, etc.) good.

In addition, after the end of the big hit game state in the present characteristic portion 239SG, the time reduction state in which time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed in a predetermined variable display number range (for example, 99 times, 7 times, 3 times, 1 time) and a normal state in which time-saving control is not performed. By performing the time saving control, the variable display time (special figure variable display time) in the variable display of the special figure is shortened compared to the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a jackpot game state, and the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, initialization processing after power-on) is executed) is performed. In the time saving control, the variable display of the special figure is executed a predetermined number of times after the end of the big hit game state, the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the game ball turns the third count switch 239SG024B in the small hit game state. It can be terminated when one of the conditions of passing through is satisfied first.

When the time saving control is performed, the variable display time (special figure variable display time) in the variable display of the special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is controlled to be shorter than the normal state. , The variable display time of the variable display of the normal pattern display device 20 (normal pattern variable display time) is shorter than in the normal state, and the variable display result in the variable display of the normal pattern at each time is "normal Control for improving the probability of "hit the figure" than in the normal state, and tilting control time for tilting control of the movable wing in the variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result of "hit" It is possible to satisfy the second start condition by making it easier for the game ball to pass through (enter) the second start winning opening, such as control to make it longer than in the normal state and control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the quality. Thus, the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning hole with the time saving control and is advantageous for the player is also called high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a combination of a plurality of controls (including all of them) may be performed.

By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the enlarged open state is increased compared to when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is easily satisfied, and the variable display of the special symbol can be executed frequently. , the time until the next variable display result becomes "big win" or "minor win" is shortened. The period during which the high opening control is executable is also called the high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time saving control is performed. A game state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state.

FIG. 10-3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this feature section 239SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10-3(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern designation command that designates a variation pattern (variable display time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-3(B), the determination result (predetermined result ), and different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-3(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit A". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit B".

In addition, in this characteristic part 239SG, by providing a fifth variable display result designation command and a sixth variable display result designation command, the CPU 103 notifies the effect control CPU 120 of the small hit type in advance before the start of the variable display. Although possible forms are exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a variable display result designation command, the CPU 103 tells the effect control CPU 120 that the variable display result is "small win". may be notified in advance before the start of the variable display.

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of variable display of decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 .

The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example.

As shown in FIG. 10-3 (C), as a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which time saving control is not performed. Command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time reduction state) in which time reduction control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure once after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A. Command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high base state, time reduction state) in which time reduction control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure three times after the end of the jackpot B jackpot game. Command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high base state, time reduction state) in which time reduction control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure 99 times after the jackpot game of jackpot C ends. Command 9504H is a fifth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high base state, time reduction state) in which time reduction control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure seven times after the end of the jackpot D jackpot game. Command 9505H is a sixth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high base state, time reduction state) in which time reduction control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure 99 times after the end of the jackpot E jackpot game.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the large winning opening to notify that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning mouth and the notification command after opening the big winning mouth, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or the small win game state (for example, "1" to "10"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified in the first reserved storage display area 239SG005D or the like. Command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number in the second reserved storage display area 239SG005U or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH is a symbol designating command designating the winning determination result at the start winning.

The command D100H is a V prize notification specifying command for notifying that the game ball has passed the third count switch 239SG024B and the third count switch 239SG024B has been turned on. Command D2XXH is a remaining second special figure time saving frequency notification command for notifying the remaining time saving control frequency of the second special symbol in the time saving state. The command D3XX is a number-of-prize-balls notification command for notifying the number of prize balls generated (given) when a game ball enters the winning hole.

FIG. 10-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-4, in this characteristic portion 239SG, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the hit type, and the random number MR2 for determining the variation pattern. Numerical data representing the numerical value MR3, the random number MR4 for judging the results of the normal map display, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

FIG. 10-5 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 239SG. In this characteristic portion 239SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases such as when the display result is a "big win" and when the variable display result is a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-5(A) and 10-5(B), in the present characterizing portion 239SG, a plurality of different variation patterns are provided in advance according to the special symbols for executing variable display.

As shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of normal reach is executed, a super reach α, and a super reach. There is a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach effect such as β is executed. In addition, in this characteristic portion 239SG, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), among the variation patterns of the first special symbols in the characteristic portion 239SG, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed, super reach variation It is set shorter than the patterns super reach α and super reach β. In addition, for the special figure variable display time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach production of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed in this characteristic part 239SG, the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is executed The special figure variable display time is set longer than the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 239SG, as described above, the variable display result is "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. In the pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (B), as the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the present characteristic portion 239SG, non-reach variation having a special symbol variable display time different from the variation pattern of the first special symbol Patterns and reach variation patterns are provided.

In addition, in the present characteristic unit 239SG, as will be described later, the type of the variation pattern is first determined, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern After the type of the variation pattern is first determined from the random number value, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generating program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIG. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and variation patterns of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-6 (A), a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. C) big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), in addition to the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 10-6 (D), big hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), small hit variation pattern determination table ( (not shown), a deviation fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), a normal pattern display result determination table (not shown), a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

FIG. 10-6(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with MR1 are set. In the display result determination table, the variable display special symbol designation buffer (value set by the CPU 103 when executing special symbol normal processing as a value for designating the special symbol for executing variable display) is 1 (first), that is, When the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and when the variable display special symbol designation buffer is 2 (second), that is, when the second special symbol is subject to variable display , a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set.

As shown in FIG. 10-6 (A), when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the first, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is set, but the determination value corresponding to the small hit is not set. Therefore, when the first special symbol is the object of variable display, only the big win can be won, and no small win will occur.

Further, when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the second, as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, the same judgment value as in the case where the variable display special figure designation buffer is the first is set. Even when the special symbols are variably displayed, a big win occurs with the same probability as when the first special symbol is variably displayed, and the decision value is about 1/7 less. When the second special symbol is set as the determination value corresponding to the hit, when the second special symbol is the object of the variable display, the probability (percentage) of about 1/7 is set to win the small hit. there is

That is, when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big wins shown in FIG. Also, when MR1 coincides with any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIG. The "probability" shown in FIG. 10-6(A) indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Determining whether or not to make a small win means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state. It is also about deciding whether or not.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 239SG, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit by using the display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-6(A). A small hit determination table is provided separately, and the big hit determination is a common table for the case of variable display of the first special symbol and the case of variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable display special symbol designating buffer. , and the determination of the small hit may be performed using a separate table only when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the second.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 239SG, when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the first, the determination value other than the determination value corresponding to the big hit is not set as the determination value corresponding to the small hit, that is, the small hit is Although it has been designed not to win, a part of the judgment values other than the judgment value corresponding to the big win may be set as the judgment value corresponding to the small win so that the small win can be won.

10-6 (B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. FIG. Of these, FIG. 10-6 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 10-6 (C) determines the jackpot type using the reservation memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on a random number (MR2) for hit type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine In addition, in this characteristic portion 239SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-6 (B) and (C), two types of jackpots, jackpot A and jackpot B, are provided in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol). On the other hand, the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) is provided with only one kind of big hit, the big hit C. That is, the big win that occurs when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed is one of the two types of big wins, namely, the big win A and the big win B, while when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. Only the jackpot C is generated as the jackpot.

FIG. 10-6 (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a small win pattern, the type of the small win is set to a small win A or a small win B based on the random number (MR2) for judging the type of the small win. This table is referenced to determine In addition, in this characteristic part 239SG, when the game ball passes the third count switch 239SG024B during the small winning game of the small winning A, that is, when the V winning big winning occurs, the big winning game of the big winning D is executed. When the game ball passes through the third count switch 239SG024B during the small winning game of the small winning B, that is, when the V winning big winning occurs, the big winning game with the big winning E as the big winning type is executed. It is designed to be That is, these big wins D and E are not the big win types determined by the random number value MR2 for judging the winning type extracted at the time of starting winning, but the game ball during any of the small wins A and B. is the jackpot type determined by passing through the third count switch 239SG024B.

Here, when the jackpot type in the present characteristic portion 239SG is described using FIG. ~ Jackpot E is set.

Of these jackpots A to E, the jackpot A is a jackpot in which four rounds (so-called four rounds) of changing the first jackpot to a second state advantageous to the player are repeated. In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state of the jackpot A, one time reduction control is executed targeting the variable display of the second special symbol.

The big win B is a big win in which four rounds (so-called four rounds) are repeated to change the first big winning hole to the second state that is advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big win game state of the big win B, the big win is made again until the special game is executed three times for the variable display of the second special symbol, or until the special game is executed three times. Time saving control is executed until occurs.

The jackpot C is a jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the first jackpot to a second state advantageous to the player are repeated. In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state of the jackpot C, the jackpot is won again until the special game is executed 99 times for the variable display of the second special symbol, or until the special game is executed 99 times. Time saving control is executed until occurs.

The jackpot D is a jackpot in which 9 rounds (so-called 9 rounds) of changing the second jackpot to a second state advantageous to the player are repeated. Further, after the end of the jackpot game state of the jackpot D, the jackpot is won again until the special game is executed 7 times for the variable display of the second special symbol, or until the special game is executed 7 times. Time saving control is executed until occurs.

The jackpot E is a jackpot in which 9 rounds (so-called 9 rounds) are repeated to change the second jackpot to a second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the jackpot game state of the jackpot E, the jackpot is won again until the special game is executed 99 times for the variable display of the second special symbol, or until the special game is executed 99 times. Time saving control is executed until occurs.

In addition, in the time saving state, a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state due to the increase in the probability of becoming a "normal hit". Therefore, in the time saving state and the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times immediately after the time saving state ends, when a big hit occurs as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and when the game ball is playing a small hit Since there is a case where a big hit is generated by winning a V prize at the time, a so-called continuous game state in which a big win game state is likely to occur continuously occurs.

In addition, in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the big hit A, the number of special symbols games in which the time saving control is executed is set to one time, so that the variable display of the second special symbol and the one time The ratio of the variable display result to a big hit or a small hit in any of the variable display of the second special pattern based on the maximum of four reserved memories that occurs during the variable display of the second special pattern (the above total of 5 times 2 The sum of the percentage of occurrence of a big hit in the variable display of special symbols and the percentage of occurrence of a big hit when a game ball wins V) is set to about 54%.

In addition, in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot B, since the number of special symbols games in which the time saving control is executed is set to three times, the variable display of the second special symbol three times and the three times The ratio of the variable display result to a big hit or a small hit in any of the variable display of the second special pattern based on the maximum of four reserved memories that occurs during the variable display of the second special pattern (the above total of 7 times 2 The sum of the percentage of occurrence of a big hit in the variable display of special symbols and the percentage of occurrence of a big hit when a game ball wins a V prize) is set to about 66%.

In addition, in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot D, since the number of special symbols games in which the time saving control is executed is set to 7 times, the variable display of the second special symbol of the 7 times and the 7 times of the special symbols are performed. The ratio of the variable display result to a big hit or a small hit in any of the variable display of the second special pattern based on the maximum of four reserved memories that occurs during the variable display of the second special pattern (the above total 11th 2 The sum of the percentage of occurrence of a big hit in the variable display of special symbols and the percentage of occurrence of a big hit when a game ball wins V) is set to about 82%.

Then, in the time saving state after the big win C and the big win E, the number of special symbols games in which the time saving control is executed is set to 99 times, so that the 99 times variable display of the second special symbol, The rate at which the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit in any of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the maximum of four reserved memories occurring during the variable display of the second special symbol 99 times (the above total 103 The sum of the ratio of the occurrence of a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol in the round and the ratio of the occurrence of a big hit due to the game ball winning a V prize) is set to approximately 100%.

In addition, in this characteristic part 239SG, five types of jackpot A to jackpot E are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and six or more jackpot types may be provided. Also, four or less types may be provided.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hits used when it is decided in advance that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and the variable display result will be a "small hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In particular, the big hit variation pattern determination table based on the variable display of the first special symbol is a variation pattern determination table selected when the game state is the normal state, and includes a normal reach big hit variation pattern (PB1-1), For each variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2) and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take A big hit variation pattern determination table A is provided in which numerical values are assigned as determination values. In addition, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, when the type of big win is "big win B", super reach β is easily determined, and when the type of big win is "big win A", these judgment values are easily determined. is assigned so that the super reach α is easily determined, so that when the variation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player's expectation of a "jackpot B" can be heightened. .

Furthermore, as the big hit variation pattern determination table based on the variable display of the first special symbol, it is a variation pattern determination table selected when the game state is the time saving state, and is a non-reach big hit variation pattern (PB1-4 ), there is provided a big hit variation pattern determination table B in which all random numbers within the possible range of the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are assigned as determination values.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss based on the variable display of the first special symbol, variation for loss selected when the game state is the normal state and the number of pending memories of the first special symbol is 1 or less A pattern determination table A, a variation pattern determination table B for losing selected when the game state is the normal state and the number of reserved memories of the first special symbols is 3 or more, and when the game state is the time saving state. A variation pattern determination table C for failure to be selected is prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table for loss A, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super A predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a judgment value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the reach β deviation. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss B, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol being 3 or more (PA1-2), the variation pattern of normal reach loss ( PA2-1), fluctuation pattern of deviation of super reach α (PA2-2), fluctuation pattern of deviation of super reach β (PA2-3). Numerical values are assigned as judgment values. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for deviation C, all of the ranges that the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination can take for the variation pattern (PA1-3) of the shortened non-reach deviation corresponding to the time saving control A random value is assigned as a judgment value.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 10-5(A), the fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-shortening non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, a non-reach variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, making it easier to digest the retained memories, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By starting winning when there is no reserve memory, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting prizes that are not reserved, and when the number of reserved memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long. Determining the pattern (PA1-1) lengthens the variable display time, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game due to non-execution of the variable display. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), the variation pattern (PA1-3) of the shortened non-reach deviation selected during time saving control than the variation pattern (PA1-2) of non-reach deviation fluctuates Time is short. Therefore, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed during time saving control, the variation time is shorter than when the time saving control is not executed (when the game state is normal state) Shortened non-reach out of Since the variable display is executed in the variable pattern (PA1-3), it is possible to prevent the decrease in the interest in the game due to the variable display of the second special symbol not being started during the time saving control.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 10-2 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 239SG150 as shown in FIG. It is The game control data holding area 239SG150 shown in FIG. 10-7 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 239SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 239SG151B, a normal figure reservation storage unit 239SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 239SG152. , A game control timer setting unit 239SG153, a game control counter setting unit 239SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 239SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 239SG151A is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the start winning (first starting winning) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 239SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Numerical data indicating random number MR1 for variable display result determination, random number MR2 for winning type determination, random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, etc. extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment are held data. , until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 239SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result), it becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or not.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 239SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) has occurred, it has not started yet. It stores the pending data of the special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 239SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Numerical data indicating random number MR1 for variable display result determination, random number MR2 for winning type determination, random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, etc. extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment are held data. , until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 239SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result)), which makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, reservation information (first reservation information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern pending storage unit 239SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 239SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 239SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 239SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 239SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 239SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 239SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 239SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 239SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 239SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 239SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 239SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 10-2 stores various data tables and the like used for controlling the production operation in addition to the production control program. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data that constitutes various performance control patterns, and the like. there is

As an example, in the ROM 121, the production control CPU 120 controls production operations by various production devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, the decorative LED, the production model, etc.). A production control pattern table storing a plurality of types of production control patterns to be used is stored. The performance control pattern corresponds to various performance operations to be executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is composed of data indicating the content of the control. The effect control pattern table may store, for example, a special figure variable display time effect control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, various effect control patterns, and the like.

The effect control pattern at the time of special figure variable display corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, and the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game to the derivation display of the fixed special symbol that is the result of the special figure display. , such as variable display operation of decorative patterns, reach performance, effect display operation in re-lottery effect, etc., or various effect display operations without variable display of decorative patterns, data indicating the control contents of various production operations It is configured. The notice effect control pattern is composed of, for example, data indicating the control contents of the effect operation as the notice effect executed corresponding to the notice patterns prepared in advance. Various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations to be executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1, and are composed of data indicating the control contents.

The special figure variable display performance control patterns may include a plurality of types of ready-to-win performance control patterns in which the performance mode in each ready-to-win performance is different for each variation pattern for executing the ready-to-win performance, for example.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. A data holding area 239SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 239SG190 shown in FIG. 10-8(A) includes a production control flag setting unit 239SG191, a production control timer setting unit 239SG192, a production control counter setting unit 239SG193, and a production control buffer setting unit 239SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 239SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 239SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 239SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 239SG192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 239SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 239SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 239SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 239SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing section 239SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 239SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 239SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory Corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 239SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command and number of reserved memories Three commands called notification commands (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 239SG194A are these starting entrance winning designation command, symbol designation command, reservation storage number notification command , and a storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage separately is secured.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the decorative design variation stop process executed when ending.

Furthermore, in the receiving command buffer 239SG194A at the time of start winning of this characteristic part 239SG, a panel corresponding to variable display displayed on the image display device 5 in the panel display effect processing corresponding to the second special figure variable display (Fig. 10-25) described later The storage area for setting the panel pattern determined flag indicating that the pattern (panel pattern) of the panel corresponding to the second special figure reserved storage is already decided, the buffer number "2-0" of the second special figure reserved storage ” to “2-4”.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 239SG194A at the time of starting winning. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 239SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting mouth winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command is sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , the symbol designating command, and the pending storage number notification command.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 239SG194A shown in FIG. 10-8(B) is an entry (buffer Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display is deleted. -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10-8 (B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

In addition, in this characteristic part 239SG, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the command analysis process (S75), it is determined whether or not the start winning prize designation command, the symbol designation command, and the pending memory number notification command are received. If the command is received, these commands may be stored at the beginning of the empty area of the start winning reception command buffer 239SG194A as the reserved storage of each special figure.

Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 239SG will be described. FIG. 10-9 is a flow chart showing the starting winning judgment process (S101) shown in FIG. In the starting winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (239SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (239SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (239SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation storage number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation storage number counter provided in game control counter setting section 239SG154, it should have specified the number of the 1st special figure reservation storage. 239SGS102 when the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value (239SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 239SG155 is set to "1" (239SGS103) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at 239SGS101 (239SGS101; N), and when the number of first special figure reserved storage has reached the upper limit at 239SGS102 (239SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by , it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is ON (239SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (239SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (239SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 239SG154, it is sufficient if it can identify the number of second special figure reservation memory. 239SGS105 When the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit (239SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 239SG155 is set to "2" (S106) .

After executing either of the processes of 239SGS103 and 239SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (239SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", 1 is added to the first reserved storage number count value, and when the starting buffer value is "2", 1 is added to the second reserved storage number count value. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (239SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 239SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the processing of 239SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the hit type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 239SG154. The numerical data representing the random number MR2 for the fluctuation pattern determination and the random number MR3 for judging the variation pattern are extracted (239SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting port buffer value (239SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 239SG151A, while when the start buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 239SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of hit determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit". is used to determine the jackpot type when the variable display result is "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 239SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of 239SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (239SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

After the process of 239SGS111, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination process (239SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (239SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

After executing the processing of 239SGS113, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (239SGS114). At this time, if the starting buffer value is "1" (Y at 239SGS114), the starting buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (239SGS115), and then the processing of 2390SGS104 is proceeded to. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (N at 239SGS114), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (239SGS116), then the start winning process is executed. finish. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 10-10(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed by the 239SGS 112 of FIG. 10-9 as the winning random number determination process. In this characterizing part 239SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (S110 in FIG. 6) results in special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbol) as "big hit". It is determined whether or not to control to the game state or whether to control to the small hit game state as "small hit". Also, in the variation pattern setting process (S111 in FIG. 6, FIGS. 10-11 and 10-12), determination of variation pattern which specifically defines the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected in the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number determination process of S112. Then, it is determined whether or not it is determined to derive and display a big hit pattern or a small hit pattern as a special figure display result. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, before the start of the variable display, it is determined whether or not the big win is to be made. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result will be a "big hit" or a "small hit", and based on this determination result, the effect control CPU 120 etc. As will be described later, the panel display effect is executed. become.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 10-10, the CPU 103 first selects and sets the display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-6(A) (239SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at 239SGS109 in FIG. 10-9 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (239SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of 239SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by performing point-by-point comparison. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When 239SGS123 determines that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot does not occur during variable display (239SGS123; N), it is determined whether or not the start buffer value is 1. (239 SGS124). If the starting port buffer value is 2 (239SGS124; N), then the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at 239SGS109 in FIG. 10-9 is within a predetermined small hit determination range. (239SGS125).

If the start buffer value is 1 in 239SGS124 (239SGS124; Y) or if the random number MR1 is not within the small hit determination range in 1239SGS125 (239SGS125; N), the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the loss is performed. , the winning random number determination process is terminated (239SGS126).

Further, when the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range in 239SGS125 (239SGS125; Y), transmission setting of the symbol designation command corresponding to the small hit is performed, and the random number determination process at the time of winning is completed (239SGS127).

Then, when the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range in 239SGS123 (239SGS123; Y), transmission setting of a symbol designation command corresponding to the jackpot is performed, and the random number determination process at the time of winning is completed (239SGS128). The symbol designation command set in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. .

10-11 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 10-11, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the object for which the variation pattern is to be set is the first special figure (239SGS131). Whether or not the object to set the variation pattern is the first special figure may be determined by, for example, whether or not the variation special figure designation buffer value is "1".

Then, when the target for setting the variation pattern is the first special figure (239SGS131; Y), the variable display result (whether the big hit flag or the small hit flag is set), the variation pattern determination table according to the game state Select (239SGS132).

Specifically, as a selectable variation pattern determination table, as described above, when the game state is the normal state and the variable display result is a big hit (the time saving flag is not set and the big hit flag is set The big hit variation pattern determination table A selected when the game state is a time saving state and the variable display result is a big hit (when the time saving flag and the big win flag are set). For variation pattern determination table B, when the game state is the normal state, the variable display result is out (the time saving flag and the big hit flag are not set), and the number of pending memories of the first special symbol is 1 or less The game state is the normal state, the variable display result is a loss (the time saving flag and the big hit flag are not set), and the number of pending memories of the first special symbol is 3 Loss variation pattern determination table B selected when the number is 1 or more, and loss variation selected when the game state is a time saving state (when the time saving flag is set but the jackpot flag is not set) A pattern determination table C is prepared. In addition, these fluctuation pattern determination tables may be those in which only one fluctuation pattern is uniquely determined by assigning all the values of the random number MR3 to one fluctuation pattern, Any one of the plurality of variation patterns may be determined by assigning the range values of the random number MR3 to the plurality of variation patterns without overlapping.

Then, the CPU 103 reads the random number value of MR3 stored in association with the reservation number "1" of the first special figure reservation storage unit 239SG151A, and reads the random number value in the variation pattern determination table selected at 239SGS132. After determining the associated variation pattern as the variation pattern to be set (239SGS133), the process proceeds to 239SGS149. That is, in 239SGS133, the variation pattern is determined based on the random number MR3 read from the reserved storage and the selected variation pattern determination table.

On the other hand, if the target to set the variation pattern is not the first special figure, that is, if it is the second special figure (239SGS131; N), whether the time saving flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 239SG152 is on By determining whether or not (whether it is set), it is determined whether or not the game state is a time saving state in which time saving control is performed (239SGS135). And if the time saving flag is not set (239SGS135; N), proceed to 239SGS161 shown in FIG. 10-12, and if the time saving flag is set (239SGS135; Y), add 1 to the time saving state variable display counter After updating (239SGS136), it is determined whether or not the second game state flag or the third game state flag is set (239SGS137).

In addition, the game state flag (first game state flag to sixth game state flag) is set corresponding to each game state designation command that the CPU 103 sets for transmission to the effect control board 12 in the jackpot end processing described later. is a flag. In this characterizing portion 239SG, the first game state flag is a flag indicating that the CPU 103 has set the transmission of the first game state designation command to the effect control board in the jackpot end processing, and is a second game state flag. is a flag indicating that the CPU 103 has set the transmission setting of the second game state designation command to the effect control board in the jackpot end processing, and the third game state flag is the effect control performed by the CPU 103 in the jackpot end processing. It is a flag indicating that the transmission setting of the third game state designation command has been made to the board, and the fourth game state flag means that the CPU 103 sends the fourth game state designation command to the effect control board in the jackpot end processing. It is a flag indicating that the transmission setting has been performed, and the fifth game state flag is a flag indicating that the CPU 103 has set the transmission of the fifth game state designation command to the effect control board in the jackpot end processing. , The sixth game state flag is a flag indicating that the CPU 103 has set the transmission of the sixth game state designation command to the effect control board in the jackpot end processing.

That is, the processing of 239SGS137 is whether or not the CPU 103 has set the transmission of the second game state designation command or the third game state designation command to the effect control board 12 at the end of the last big hit game (furthermore, the last big hit Whether the time-saving state controlled after the end of the game is the time-saving state in which the time-saving control is performed once after the jackpot game of the jackpot A is completed, or the time-saving state in which the time-saving control is performed three times after the jackpot game of the tail B is completed. or not).

If the second game state flag or the third game state flag is not set (239SGS137; N), proceed to 239SGS172 shown in FIG. 10-12, if the second game state flag or the third game state flag is set (239SGS137; Y), it is determined whether or not the time saving state variable display number counter indicating the number of times of variable display after being controlled to the time saving state is 1 (239SGS138).

When the time saving state variable display number counter is 1, that is, in the first variable display after being controlled in the time saving state (239SGS138; Y), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is set (239SGS139), and the big hit When the flag is set (239SGS139; Y), the variation pattern is uniquely determined as a reach jackpot variation pattern (PB3-3) with a special figure variation time of 50 seconds shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) (239SGS140) and proceed to 239SGS149. Also, when the big hit flag is not set (239SGS139; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (239SGS141). Then, when the small hit flag is set (239SGS141; Y), the fluctuation pattern of the reach small hit with a special figure fluctuation time of 50 seconds shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) (PC3-3 ) (239SGS142) and proceed to 239SGS149. Also, if the small hit flag is not set (239SGS141; N), the fluctuation pattern of the reach deviation with a special figure fluctuation time of 50 seconds shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) (PA3-5) (239SGS143) and proceed to 239SGS149.

On the other hand, if the time saving state variable display count counter is not 1 (239SGS138; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is set (239SGS144), and if the big hit flag is set (239SGS144; Y) 10-5 (B) to determine the variation pattern (PB3-1) of the non-reach jackpot in which the special figure variation time is 2 seconds (239SGS145), and proceed to 239SGS149. Also, when the big hit flag is not set (239SGS144; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (239SGS146). Then, when the small hit flag is set (239SGS146; Y), the variation pattern is a non-reach small hit variation pattern (PC3- 1) is unambiguously determined (239SGS147) and proceeds to 239SGS149. In addition, when the small hit flag is not set (239SGS146; N), the variation pattern is a non-reach out variation pattern (PA3-1 ) (239SGS148) and proceed to 239SGS149.

In addition, in 239SGS161 that shifts when it is determined as "N" in 239SGS135 because the time saving flag is not set, either the second game state flag or the third game state flag is set at the end of the big hit game. determine whether or not there is

Then, when either the second game state flag or the third game state flag is set, that is, after the game state is controlled to the time saving state after the jackpot A or the jackpot B is completed, the game state is changed. Furthermore, when the time saving state is controlled to the normal state (239SGS161; Y), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is set (239SGS162), and when the big hit flag is set (239SGS162; Y) The variation pattern is uniquely determined to the variation pattern (PB3-2) of reach jackpot with a special figure variation time of 20 seconds shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) (239SGS163) and proceeds to 239SGS149. Also, when the big hit flag is not set (239SGS162; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (239SGS164). Then, when the small hit flag is set (239SGS164; Y), the fluctuation pattern of the reach small hit with a special figure fluctuation time of 20 seconds shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) (PC3-2 ) (239SGS165) and proceed to 239SGS149. In addition, if the small hit flag is not set (239SGS164; N), the fluctuation pattern of the reach deviation with a special figure fluctuation time of 20 seconds shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) (PA3-4) (239SGS166) and proceed to 239SGS149.

On the other hand, when neither the second game state flag nor the third game state flag is set, that is, after the game state is controlled to the time saving state after the end of any one of the big hits C to E, When the game state is further controlled from the time saving state to the normal state (239SGS161; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is set (239SGS167), and when the big hit flag is set (239SGS167; Y ), the variation pattern is uniquely determined to be a non-reach jackpot variation pattern (PB3-1) with a special figure variation time of 2 seconds (239SGS168) shown in FIG. Also, when the big hit flag is not set (239SGS167; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (239SGS169). Then, when the small hit flag is set (239SGS169; Y), the variation pattern is a non-reach small hit variation pattern (PC3- 1) is uniquely determined (239SGS170) and proceeds to 239SGS149. In addition, when the small hit flag is not set (239SGS169; N), the variation pattern is a non-reach out variation pattern (PA3-1 ) (239SGS171) and proceed to 239SGS149.

Also, although the time saving flag is set (239SGS135; Y), if it is determined as "N" in 239SGS137 because neither the second game state flag nor the third game state flag is set (that is, In 239SGS172 that shifts to the time saving state after the end of any one of the jackpot C to jackpot E), whether the value of the time saving state variable display number counter is any one of 1 to 6 , In other words, it is determined whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol is within six times after being controlled to the time saving state. If the value of the time saving state variable display counter is any one of 1 to 6, 239SGS172; Y), determine whether the big hit flag is set (239SGS173), and if the big hit flag is set ( In 239SGS173; Y), the variation pattern is uniquely determined to be a reach jackpot variation pattern (PB3-2) with a special figure variation time of 20 seconds shown in FIG. move on. Also, when the big hit flag is not set (239SGS173; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (239SGS175). Then, when the small hit flag is set (239SGS175; Y), the fluctuation pattern of the reach small hit with a special figure fluctuation time of 20 seconds shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) (PC3-2 ) (239SGS176) and proceed to 239SGS149. Also, if the small hit flag is not set (239SGS175; N), the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (PA3-2 ) (239SGS177) and proceed to 239SGS149.

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving state variable display number counter is not one of 1 to 6, 239SGS172; N), and further, it is determined whether or not the time saving state variable display number counter is 7 (239SGS178). When the time saving state variable display count counter is 7 (239SGS178; Y), whether or not the fourth game state flag is set, that is, the time saving state is the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot D is completed. (239SGS179).

When the fourth game state flag is not set (239SGS179; Y), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is set (239SGS180), and when the big hit flag is set (239SGS180; Y) The variation pattern is uniquely determined to the variation pattern (PB3-2) of reach jackpot with a special figure variation time of 20 seconds shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) (239SGS181) and proceeds to 239SGS149. Also, when the big hit flag is not set (239SGS180; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (239SGS182). Then, when the small hit flag is set (239SGS182; Y), the fluctuation pattern of the reach small hit with a special figure fluctuation time of 20 seconds shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) (PC3-2 ) (239SGS183) and proceed to 239SGS149. In addition, when the small hit flag is not set (239SGS182; N), the variation pattern is a variation pattern (PA3-4 ) (239SGS184) and proceed to 239SGS149.

On the other hand, if the time saving state variable display count counter is not 7 (239SGS178; N) or if the fourth game state flag is set (239SGS179; N), is the sixth game state flag set? It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not the time saving state is the time saving state after the jackpot game E is finished (239SGS185).

When the sixth game state flag is not set (239SGS185; N), the process of 239SGS173 to 239SGS177 is executed to determine the variation pattern to be one of PB3-2, PC3-2 and PA3-2. Then proceed to 239SGS149, if the sixth game state flag is set (239SGS185; Y), further, whether the value of the time saving state variable display number counter is any value of 8 to 10, that is , It is determined whether or not it is the 8th to 10th variable display of the second special figure after being controlled to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot E (239SGS186). If the value of the time saving state variable display number counter is any value of 8 to 10, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is set (239SGS187), and if the big hit flag is set (239SGS187; In Y), the variation pattern is uniquely determined to be a non-reach jackpot variation pattern (PB3-1) with a special figure variation time of 2 seconds shown in FIG. . Also, when the big hit flag is not set (239SGS187; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (239SGS189). Then, when the small hit flag is set (239SGS189; Y), the variation pattern is a non-reach small hit variation pattern (PC3- 1) is uniquely determined (239SGS190) and proceeds to 239SGS149. Also, when the small hit flag is not set (239SGS189; N), the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (PA3-1 ) (239SGS191) and proceed to 239SGS149.

Also, if the value of the time saving state variable display number counter is not one of the values 8 to 10 (239SGS186; N), further determine whether the value of the time saving state variable display number counter is 11 ( 239SGS192), if the value of the time-saving state variable display frequency counter is not 11, that is, if it is the 11th variable display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot E (239SGS192; N), 239SGS173 mentioned above Execute the processing of ~ 239SGS177 to determine the variation pattern to either PB3-2, PC3-2, PA3-2 and proceed to 239SGS149, and if the value of the time saving state variable display number counter is 11 239SGS192; Y), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is set (239SGS193), and when the big hit flag is set (239SGS193; Y), the fluctuation pattern is the special figure fluctuation shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) The variation pattern (PB3-2) of the reach jackpot whose time is 20 seconds is uniquely determined (239SGS194) and proceeds to 239SGS149. Also, when the big hit flag is not set (239SGS193; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (239SGS195). Then, when the small hit flag is set (239SGS195; Y), the fluctuation pattern of the reach small hit with a special figure fluctuation time of 20 seconds shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) (PC3-2 ) (239SGS196) and proceed to 239SGS149. Also, if the small hit flag is not set (239SGS195; N), the variation pattern is a non-reach out variation pattern (PA3-3 ) (239SGS197) and proceed to 239SGS149.

In 239SGS149, according to the variable special figure designation buffer value, a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B The setting for starting the variation of the special symbols is performed so as to start one of the figure games. As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the drive signal to update the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

Following the processing of 239SGS149, settings are made for transmitting various commands for when the special symbols start to fluctuate (239SGS150). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the game state designation command, the first variable display start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the first pending storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address (top address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance, the game control buffer setting unit The data is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the H.239SG155. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends the game state designation command, the second variable display start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, and the variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the second pending storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit 239SG155. Stores in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. In addition, various commands for which the transmission setting is performed are transmitted to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control processing shown in FIG. 4 by the CPU 103 .

After executing the process of 239SGS150, the special figure variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol corresponding to the determination result of the variation pattern, is set (239SGS151). The special symbol variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the stop display of the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result (special symbol display result). is the required time. Thereafter, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" which is the value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (239SGS152), the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

FIG. 10-13 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 5 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the symbol fixing period timer is in operation (during timer counting) (239SGS201).

When the pattern fixing period timer is in operation (239SGS201; Y), after subtracting 1 from the pattern fixing period timer described later (239SGS213), it is determined whether or not the pattern fixing period timer has timed out (239SGS214). . When the pattern fixing period timer has not timed out (239SGS214; N), the special pattern stopping process is terminated, and when the pattern fixing period timer has timed out (239SGS214; Y), the stopped pattern is out of the pattern. (239SGS215) to determine whether or not, if the design is out (239SGS215; Y), the value of the special design process flag is a value corresponding to the special design normal processing "0" after updating (239SGS216), the special symbol stop processing ends.

Further, when the stopped pattern is not a lost pattern (239SGS215; N), it is determined whether or not the stopped pattern is a jackpot pattern (239SGS217), and when it is a jackpot pattern (239SGS217; Y), a special pattern is determined. After updating the value of the process flag to "4" corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (239SGS218), the special symbol stop processing is terminated. In addition to the processing of 239SGS218, the setting of a big hit display time timer and the processing of setting the number of times the big win has been opened to an opening number counter may be executed.

Further, when the stopped design is not a big hit design (239SGS217; N), since the stopped design is a small hit design, the value of the special process flag is set to "8" which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing. (239SGS219), the special symbol stop processing is terminated. In addition to the processing of 239SGS219, the setting of the small hit display time timer and the processing of setting the number of times the small win is opened to the opening number counter may be executed.

On the other hand, when the symbol fixing period timer is not in operation (239SGS201; N), the variation of the special symbol is terminated, and the stop symbol is displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. display) is performed (239SGS202). In addition, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special figure, the fluctuation of the first special design in the first special design display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. Also, the stop symbol is determined at the start of the variable display.

In addition, the control which transmits the design decision command to production control board 12 is done (239SGS203). Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is set (239SGS204), and when the big hit flag is not set (239SGS204; N), it is further determined whether or not the small hit flag is set ( 239SGS231), if the small hit flag is not set (239SGS231; N), it is further determined whether or not the time saving flag is set (239SGS246), if the time saving flag is not set (239SGS246; N) ), after setting a value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) to the symbol determination period timer (239SGS257), a game state designation command for designating a normal state corresponding to the fact that the time saving flag is not set And the setting for transmitting the remaining second special figure time saving number of times notification command is performed (239SGS258), and the special symbol stop process is ended.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is set (239SGS204; Y), the CPU 103, if the time saving flag is set, if the time saving flag is set, the game state flag (first game state flag to sixth game state flag) is cleared (239SGS205), and a winning start 1 designation command (jackpot A), a winning start 2 designation command (jackpot B), and a winning start 3 designation command are issued according to the types of jackpots stored in the performance control board 12. (239SGS207) for transmitting (jackpot C).

Furthermore, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a game state specifying command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (239SGS208). Then, a value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) is set in the symbol fixing period timer (239SGS209), and the special symbol stopping process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is set (239SGS231; Y), the effect control board 12 outputs a hit start 4 designation command (small hit A) or a hit start 5 designation command (small hit B ) is set (239SGS232). Then, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set (239SGS233).

When the time saving flag is not set (239SGS233; N), after setting the value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) to the symbol fixing period timer (239SGS240), the time saving flag is not set. (239SGS241), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

Also, if the time saving flag is set (239SGS233; Y), after -1 the total time saving number counter (239SGS234), whether the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is "1" indicating the first special figure (239SGS235). Then, if the variable special figure designation buffer is not "1" (239SGS235; N), that is, if the target of the stop display is the second special figure, the second special figure time saving counter is reduced by -1 ( 239SGS236), proceed to 239SGS237, and if the variable special figure designation buffer is "1" (239SGS235; Y), that is, if the target of the stop display is the first special figure, go to 239SGS237 without executing 239SGS236 move on.

In 239SGS237, it is determined whether or not the value of the total time saving number counter or the second special figure time saving number counter is 0. Then, if the value of the total time saving number counter or the second special time saving number counter is not 0 (239SGS237; N), the value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) to the pattern confirmation period timer After setting (239SGS240), set for sending the game state designation command specifying the time saving state corresponding to the time saving flag being set and the remaining second special figure time saving number notification command (239SGS241), special End the symbol stop process.

If the value of the total time saving number counter or the second special figure time saving number counter is 0 (239SGS237; Y), clear the time saving flag (239SGS238), the total time saving number counter and the second special figure time saving number After clearing the value of the counter (239SGS239), the value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) is set in the symbol fixed period timer (239SGS240), and the time saving flag is not set by clearing Normal Settings for transmitting a game state designation command designating a state are made (239SGS241), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated. In addition, in the processing of 239SGS241 when the time saving flag is cleared, since the time saving flag is not set, the setting for transmitting the second special figure time saving number notification command need not be executed.

On the other hand, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set and the time saving flag is set (239SGS246; Y), that is, when the misaligned pattern is stopped and displayed in the time saving state, the total time saving number counter After -1 (239SGS249), it is determined whether or not the variable special figure designation buffer is "1" indicating the first special figure (239SGS248). Then, if the variable special figure designation buffer is not "1" (239SGS248; N), that is, if the target of the stop display is the second special figure, the second special figure time saving counter is reduced by -1 ( 239SGS249), proceed to 239SGS250, and if the variable special figure designation buffer is "1" (239SGS248; Y), that is, if the target of the stop display is the first special figure, go to 239SGS250 without executing 239SGS249 move on.

In 239SGS250, it is determined whether or not the value of the total time saving number counter or the second special figure time saving number counter is zero. And, when the value of the total time saving number counter or the second special figure time saving number counter is 0 (239SGS250; Y), along with clearing the time saving flag (239SGS251), the total time saving number counter and the second special figure After clearing the value of the time saving number counter (239SGS252), set the value corresponding to the first period (10 seconds) to the pattern fixed period timer (239SGS253), and the time saving flag is not set by clearing Normal Settings for transmitting a game state designation command designating a state are made (239SGS258), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated. In addition, in the process of 239SGS258 when the time saving flag is cleared, since the time saving flag is not set, it is not necessary to perform the setting for transmitting the second special figure time saving number notification command.

Also, if the value of the total time saving number counter or the second special time saving number counter is not 0 (239SGS250; N), it is further determined whether the value of the time saving state variable display number counter is 7 (239 SGS254). If the value of the time saving state variable display number counter is not 7 (239SGS254; N), after setting the value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) to the pattern fixing period timer (239SGS257), the time saving flag is set. Setting for transmitting the game state designation command specifying the time saving state corresponding to being done and the remaining second special figure time saving number notification command (239SGS258), ending the special symbol stop processing, while the time saving state variable When the value of the display number counter is 7 (239SGS254; Y), it is determined whether or not the type of the previous big win game is the big win E (239SGS255). Incidentally, whether or not the type of the previous jackpot game is the jackpot E may be determined by whether or not the big 6 game state designation command is received from the main substrate 11 when being controlled to the time saving state.

When the type of the previous jackpot game is the jackpot E (239SGS255; Y), after setting the value corresponding to the first period (10 seconds) to the pattern fixing period timer, the time saving flag is set. Settings for transmitting the game state specifying command specifying the corresponding time saving state and the remaining second special figure time saving number notification command are performed (239SGS258), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the type of the previous jackpot game is not jackpot E (239SGS255; N), after setting a value corresponding to the second period (0.5 seconds) to the pattern fixing period timer, the time saving flag is set. Setting for transmitting the game state designation command for designating the time saving state corresponding to being present and the remaining second special figure time saving number notification command (239SGS258), the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

Thus, in this characterizing portion 239SG, after the big hit game is finished, the variable display of the second special symbol of the number of times set in the second special figure time saving number counter is executed, or the total time saving number counter is set. It is set so that the time saving state continues until the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the number of times is executed. For this reason, for example, when the time-saving state is controlled in a state where the second special symbol reservation memory does not exist, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed before the variable display of the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent the loss of interest due to the player missing an opportunity for the display result to be a small hit.

In addition, in the conventional pachinko game machine, when the last variable display of the time saving state ends, the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the symbol fixed period of the variable display ends, but the pachinko game machine of this characteristic part 239SG 1, when the last variable display of the time saving state ends, the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the variable display ends (FIG. 10-23).

FIG. 10-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in 118 of FIG. 5 as the small hit opening pre-processing. In the small hit opening preprocessing, the CPU 103 first decrements the small hit display time timer by 1 (239SGS261), and determines whether or not the small hit display time timer has timed out (239SGS262). When the small hit display time timer has not timed out (239SGS262; N), while ending the small hit opening preprocessing, when the small hit display time timer has timed out (239SGS262; Y), the second big prize A value corresponding to a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) is set in an open time timer for opening the mouth (239SGS263). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "9" (239SGS264), which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening process (S119), and the small hit opening pre-processing ends.

FIG. 10-15 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S119 of FIG. 6 as the small hit open process. (239SGS271). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the open time timer has timed out (239SGS272).

When the opening time timer has timed out (239SGS272; Y), it shifts to 239SGS285, and when the opening time timer has not timed out (239SGS272; N), whether it is the opening timing of the second big prize winning opening. (239SGS273). When it is time to open the second big winning gate, the CPU 103 drives the solenoid 239SG083 for the second big winning gate door 239SG711 to open the second big winning gate (239SGS274). Then, the transmission setting of the designation command during the opening of the big winning opening corresponding to the round is performed (239SGS275), and the process proceeds to 239SGS276. It should be noted that the command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening, which is set for transmission in 239SGS275, is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control processing. If it is not the opening timing of the second big winning hole (239SGS273; N), the process proceeds to 239SGS276 without going through 239SGS274 and 239SGS275.

At 239SGS276, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is time to close the second big winning opening (239SGS276). When it is time to close the second big winning gate (239SGS276; Y), the CPU 103 controls the second big winning gate to close by driving the solenoid 239SG083 for the second big winning gate 239SG711 (239SGS277). . Then, the transmission setting of the designated command after the opening of the big winning opening corresponding to the round is performed (239SGS278), and the process proceeds to 239SGS279. It should be noted that the command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening, which is set for transmission in 239SGS278, is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control process. If it is not the closing timing of the second big prize winning opening (239SGS276; N), the process proceeds to 239SGS279 without going through 239SGS277 and 239SGS278.

At 239SGS279, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the third count switch 239SG024B is turned on (239SGS279). When the third count switch 239SG024B is not turned on (239SGS279; N), the small hit open process is terminated, and when the third count switch 239SG024B is turned on (239SGS279; Y), the third It is determined whether or not the V winning flag indicating that the count switch 239SG024B has been turned on, that is, the game ball has passed through the third count switch 239SG024B is set (239SGS280). When the V winning flag is set (239SGS280; Y), the small hit opening process is terminated, and when the V winning flag is not set (239SGS280; N), the V winning flag is set (239SGS281). .

Then, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the V winning notification command to the effect control board 12 (239SGS282). Incidentally, the V winning notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control process (S27). In addition, if the second big winning opening is open, the CPU 103 drives the solenoid 239SG083 for the second big winning opening door 239SG711 to close the second big winning opening (239SGS283). Clear the timer (239SGS284).

Then, at 239SGS285, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "10" (239SGS285), which is a value corresponding to the small-hit end processing (S120), and ends the small-hit open processing.

FIG. 10-16 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in S120 of FIG. 6 as the small-hit end processing. (239SGS301). When the small hit end display timer is not in operation (239SGS301; N), the small win flag is cleared (239SGS302), and transmission setting of a hit end designation command corresponding to the small win is set for the performance control board 12 (239SGS303). ). Incidentally, the hit end designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control process (S17). Then, a value corresponding to the small-hit end display time is set to the small-hit end display timer (239SGS304), and the small-hit end processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the small hit end display timer is in operation (239SGS301; Y), the value of the small hit end display timer is decremented by -1 (239SGS305). Then, it is determined whether or not the small-hit end display time has elapsed, that is, whether or not the small-hit end display timer has timed out (239SGS306). When the small hit end display time has not elapsed (239SGS306; N), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the third count switch 239SG024B is turned on (239SGS307). When the third count switch 239SG024B is not turned on (239SGS307; N), the small hit end processing is terminated, and when the third count switch 239SG024B is turned on (239SGS307; Y), the third count is already made. It is determined whether the switch 239SG024B has been turned on, that is, whether or not the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the third count switch 239SG024B is set (239SGS308). When the V winning flag is set (239SGS308; Y), the minor winning end processing is terminated, and when the V winning flag is not set (239SGS308; N), the V winning flag is set (239SGS309).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the V winning notification command to the effect control board 12 (239SGS310), and ends the small winning end processing. Incidentally, the V winning notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control process (S17).

Also, when the small hit end display time has passed at 239SGS306 (239SGS306; Y), the CPI 103 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (239SGS311). When the V winning flag is gusseted (239SGS311; Y), the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag and sets the big hit flag (239SGS312, 239SGS313). Then, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type from "jackpot D" and "jackpot E" based on the minor jackpot type in which the V winning occurred (239SGS314). As for the jackpot type, as shown in FIG. 10-6(D), if the jackpot type in which the V prize is generated is "small hit A", the jackpot type is determined to be "jackpot D". When the type of small win in which the V prize is generated is "small win B", the type of big win is determined to be "big win E". Corresponding to the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 239SG155 (239SGS315), the determined jackpot type Store and go to 239SGS316.

After executing 239SGS315, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" (239SGS316), which is a value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (S114), and ends the small hit end processing.

That is, in the present characteristic portion 239SG, the game ball passes through the third count switch 239SG024B not only during the small winning game but also during the period until the small winning end display time after the small winning game ends. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the second big winning hole just before the end of the small winning game, the game ball passes through the third count switch 239SG024B, so that the big winning game is executed after the end of the small winning end process. It is designed to be

In addition, when the V winning flag is not set in 239SGS311 (239SGS311; N), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) ( 239SGS317), ending the small hit ending process.

FIG. 10-17 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot ending process.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is counting (239SGS321). When the jackpot end display timer is not in operation (239SGS321; N), a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (jackpot end display time) for performing the jackpot end display on the image display device 5 is set to the jackpot end display timer. set (239SGS322) and terminate the process.

On the other hand, when the jackpot end display timer is in operation (239SGS321; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (239SGS323). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big-hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big-hit end display time has elapsed (239SGS324). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (239SGS324; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the stored jackpot type is jackpot A (239SGS325). If the jackpot type is a jackpot A (239SGS325; Y), set "1" to the second special time saving number counter and set "5" to the total time saving number counter (239SGS326, 239SGS327), to 239SGS339 move on.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is not jackpot A (239SGS325; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot B (239SGS328). If the jackpot type is a jackpot B (239SGS328; Y), set "3" to the second special time saving counter and set "7" to the total time saving counter (239SGS329, 239SGS330), to 239SGS339 move on.

Furthermore, when the jackpot type is not jackpot B (239SGS328; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot C (239SGS331). If the jackpot type is the jackpot C (239SGS331; Y), set "99" to the second special time saving counter and set "100" to the total time saving counter (239SGS332, 239SGS333), to 239SGS339 move on.

Furthermore, when the jackpot type is not jackpot C (239SGS321; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot D (239SGS334). If the jackpot type is a jackpot D (239SGS334; Y), set "7" to the second special time saving counter and set "11" to the total time saving counter (239SGS335, 239SGS336), to 239SGS339 move on.

Then, if the jackpot type is not the jackpot D (239SGS334; N), the jackpot type is the jackpot E, and the second special figure time-saving number counter is set to "99" and the total time-saving number counter is set to "100". Set (239SGS337, 239SGS338) and go to 239SGS339.

In 239SGS339, the CPU 103 sets the transmission setting of the game state designation command according to the jackpot type of the executed jackpot game. In addition, in 239SGS339, the CPU 103 gives a second game state designation command if the jackpot type of the executed jackpot game is jackpot A, and a third game state designation command if the jackpot type of the executed jackpot game is jackpot B, and the executed jackpot. If the jackpot type of the game is jackpot C, the fourth game state designation command, if the jackpot type of the executed jackpot game is jackpot D, the fifth game state designation command, if the jackpot type of the executed jackpot game is jackpot E. What is necessary is just to perform the transmission setting of the 6th game state designation|designated command. In addition, the game state designation command set for transmission in 239SGS339 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control processing shown in FIG.

After executing the process of 239SGS339, the CPU 103 sets the time saving state variable display number counter to "0" and ends the jackpot ending process (239SGS340).

By executing each process by the CPU 103 as described above, as shown in FIG. Runs for 50 seconds. After the variable display ends, the time-saving flag is cleared at the timing when the variable display ends (the game state is controlled to the normal state), and the variable display is performed over the first period (10 seconds) as the symbol fixing period. be stopped. After the first period has passed, the variable display of the second special symbol for 20 seconds is performed up to four times while the game state is controlled to the normal state. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbols up to four times, when the variable display ends, the variable display is stopped over the second period (0.5 seconds).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-18(B), after the jackpot game of jackpot B is finished, first, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed three times as a time saving state. The first variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is performed over 50 seconds, and the second and third variable displays of the second special symbol are performed over 2 seconds. In the first and second variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display is stopped over the second period (0.5 seconds) when the variable display ends. In the variable display of the second special symbol for the third time, the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the variable display is completed (the game state is controlled to the normal state), and the first period (10 seconds) is used as the symbol determination period. to stop the variable display. After the first period has passed, the variable display of the second special symbol for 20 seconds is performed up to four times while the game state is controlled to the normal state. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbols up to four times, when the variable display ends, the variable display is stopped over the second period (0.5 seconds).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-19(A), after the jackpot game of jackpot C is finished, first, variable display of the second special symbol is executed 99 times as a time saving state. The first to 98th variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is performed over 7 seconds, and the 99th variable display of the second special symbol is performed over 20 seconds. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbol from the 1st time to the 98th time, when the variable display ends, the variable display is stopped over the second period (0.5 seconds). In the 99th variable display of the second special symbol, the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the variable display is completed (the game state is controlled to the normal state), and the first period (10 seconds) is used as the symbol determination period. to stop the variable display. Then, after the first period has passed, the variable display of the second special symbol for 2 seconds is executed up to 4 times while the game state is controlled to the normal state. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbols up to four times, when the variable display ends, the variable display is stopped over the second period (0.5 seconds).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-19(B), after the jackpot game of jackpot D is finished, first, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times as a time saving state. The first to sixth variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is performed over 7 seconds, and the seventh variable display of the second special symbol is performed over 20 seconds. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbols from the first time to the sixth time, when the variable display is completed, the variable display is stopped over the second period (0.5 seconds). In the seventh variable display of the second special symbol, the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the variable display is completed (the game state is controlled to the normal state), and the first period (10 seconds) is used as the symbol determination period. to stop the variable display. Then, after the first period has passed, the variable display of the second special symbol for 2 seconds is executed up to 4 times while the game state is controlled to the normal state. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbols up to four times, when the variable display ends, the variable display is stopped over the second period (0.5 seconds).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-20, after the jackpot game of jackpot E is finished, first, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed 99 times as a time saving state. The first to sixth variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is performed over 7 seconds, and the seventh variable display of the second special symbol is performed over 20 seconds. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbols from the first time to the sixth time, when the variable display is completed, the variable display is stopped over the second period (0.5 seconds). In the seventh variable display of the second special symbol, when the variable display ends, the variable display is stopped over the first period (10 seconds) as a symbol fixing period. After the first period has passed, the variable display of the second special symbol from the 8th time to the 10th time is performed for 2 seconds. Then, the variable display of the 11th second special symbol is performed for 15 seconds. In addition, in the eighth to eleventh variable display of the second special symbol, when the variable display ends, the variable display is stopped over the second period (0.5 seconds). For the variable display of the second special symbol from the twelfth time onward, the same control (see FIG. 10-19(A)) as after the jackpot game of jackpot C is finished is executed.

Next, variable display of normal symbols will be described. 10-21 is a flow chart showing the normal symbol process shown in FIG. In the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the gate switch 21 is turned on, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 (239SGS351). When the gate switch 21 is turned on (239SGS351; Y), the general pattern gate passing process (239SGS352) is executed. In the general pattern gate passing process, for example, it is determined whether or not the general pattern reservation storage number is the upper limit value (eg, 4). When the normal pattern reservation memory number is not the upper limit value, the normal pattern reservation memory number is incremented by 1, the value of the random number MR4 is extracted, and the extracted value is stored as a new normal pattern reservation memory.

When the gate switch 21 is off after execution of the general pattern gate passing process (239SGS351; N), the CPU 103 executes any of the processes of 239SGS353 to 239SGS357 according to the value of the general pattern process flag.

The normal design normal process of 239SGS353 is executed when the value of the normal pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal design normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the normal design game (normal design variable display) based on the presence or absence of hold information. Also, in the normal pattern normal processing, based on the value of the random number MR4 extracted in the normal pattern gate passage processing, the display result is derived as to whether or not the display result of the normal pattern is "hit (normal pattern hit)". Decide (predetermine) before it is displayed. Furthermore, in the normal symbol normal process, a fixed normal symbol (either a winning symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the normal symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the normal pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal pattern normal process ends.

The normal symbol variation pattern setting process of 239SGS354 is executed when the value of the normal pattern process flag is "1". In this normal symbol variation pattern setting process, the normal symbol variation pattern is determined as shown in FIG. It includes processing to In addition, in the normal symbol variation pattern setting process in the present characterizing portion 239SG, when the display result of the normal symbol is "lost" and the game state is the time saving state, the normal symbol variation pattern is set to 1 normal symbol variation time. If the variation pattern (FA1-1) is uniquely determined to be second, and the display result of the normal symbol is "loss" and the game state is other than the time saving state, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is normal. When the variation pattern (FA1-2) where the figure variation time is 30 seconds is uniquely determined, and the display result of the normal symbol is "hit" and the game state is the time saving state, the normal symbol When the variation pattern is univocally determined to be a winning variation pattern (FB1-1) in which the normal pattern variation time is 1 second, and the display result of the normal pattern is "win" and the game state is other than the time saving state. , has a form that uniquely determines the variation pattern of the normal design to the variation pattern (FB1-2) per normal design variation time is 30 seconds. In the normal symbol variation pattern setting process, when the normal symbol variation pattern is determined, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to "2", and the normal symbol variation pattern setting process ends.

239SGS355 normal design variation processing is executed when the value of the normal pattern process flag is "2". This normal design variation processing includes processing for setting the normal design to be variably displayed on the normal design display device 20, processing for measuring the elapsed time after the normal design is started to be variably displayed, and the like. ing. Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbols reaches the normal fluctuation time, the value of the normal pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the normal symbol fluctuation processing ends.

The normal design stop processing of 239SGS356 is executed when the value of the normal pattern process flag is "3". This normal symbol stop processing includes a setting process for stopping the variable display of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 20 and for stopping and displaying (deriving) the fixed normal symbols that are the display result of the normal symbols. ing. Then, when the display result is "hit", the value of the normal pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the display result is "missing", the value of the normal pattern process flag is updated to "0".

239SGS357 during normal electric accessary product opening process, the normal electric accessary product open pattern is set based on the execution when the value of the general figure process flag is "4". Then, a process of repeatedly changing the variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) between the open state and the closed state by driving the solenoid 81 based on the set normal electric accessory opening pattern is executed.

10-22(A), in the characteristic portion 239SG, one normal electric accessary product release pattern is uniquely set based on the display result of the normal symbol being "hit". be. By setting the normal electric accessory opening pattern, the variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) is opened 3 times for 2 seconds over 8 seconds and closed 2 times for 1 second. Change.

Then, when the control of the open state and the closed state of the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric role product) based on the normal electric role product opening pattern is completed, the value of the normal figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the normal The processing during the electric accessary product opening ends.

By executing the normal symbol process processing as described above, when the display result of the normal symbol is "hit", the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) is always opened and closed ( control to open state and closed state) is completed in 8 seconds.

Also, as described above, in the conventional pachinko game machine, when the last variable display of the time saving state ends, the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the symbol fixed period of the variable display ends, while this feature In the pachinko game machine 1 of the part 239SG, when the last variable display of the time saving state ends, the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the variable display ends. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-23 (A), in the conventional pachinko game machine 1, when a normal pattern hit occurs within the pattern fixed period after the variable display of the last second special pattern in the time saving state, the game After the state is controlled to the normal state, opening and closing of the variable winning ball device 6B may be executed until the variable display of the second special symbol. At this time, the game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 6B (the game ball is placed in a state where the first variable display of the second special symbol in the normal state is started and the number of the second special symbol pending storage is 3). If the variable winning ball device 6B wins a prize), the variable display of the second special symbol will be executed a maximum of five times after the game state is controlled to the normal state, and the second special after the end of the time saving state. Based on the variable display of symbols, the ratio of control to the big win game state is excessively increased.

On the other hand, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present characteristic portion 239SG, as shown in FIG. 10-23 (B), the time saving flag is cleared at the timing when the last variable display of the time saving state ends, so the end of the time saving state When the variable display of the normal symbol is started during the variable display of the second special symbol, if the display result of the normal symbol is "hit (ordinary figure hit)", it is always during the symbol confirmation period of 10 seconds, that is, , The opening and closing of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed during the period when the second special figure reservation memory is four at maximum. That is, in the present characteristic portion 239SG, when the variable winning ball device 6B opens and closes during the pattern fixing period immediately after the time saving control ends, even if the game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure is reserved. Only a maximum of 4 memories are accumulated, and after the game state is controlled to the normal state and the first variable display of the second special symbol starts, a new second special symbol pending memory can be generated. Since the performance is extremely low, it is prevented that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state based on the variable display of the second special symbol after the end of the time saving state is excessively increased like the conventional pachinko game machine described above. there is

Next, control executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

10-24 is a flow chart showing part of the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first displays the variable display of the second special symbol being executed and the panel corresponding to the second special symbol pending storage after the jackpot game of the jackpot A or the jackpot B is completed. 5, a panel display effect process (239SGS361) for executing a panel display effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big win or a small win, and when the game state is the normal state, the big win A to the big win C. The number of winning balls received from the CPU 103 during the period from when the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state to when the game state is controlled to the normal state and the variable display is started four times (hereinafter referred to as the consecutive game period). Based on the number of times the notification command or the production process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the production process during the big win, the number of times the jackpot game state is controlled (the number of jackpots) and the number of prize balls paid out during the continuous period The number of big hits and the number of won prize balls counting process (239SGS362) for counting (the number of won prize balls), the number of big hits and the number of won prize balls counted in the number of big hits and the number of won prize balls are displayed on the image display device 5. Result image display processing (239SG363), for updating the background displayed on the image display device 5 to the first background indicating that the game state is the normal state and the second background image indicating that the game state is the time-saving state. In the background image update process (239SGS364), in the time saving state after the jackpot B jackpot game ends, the first variable display of the second special symbol and the second and third variable display of the second special symbol (second special symbol (variable display based on the first reserved memory or variable display based on the second reserved memory) to execute a win/fail notification effect for notifying that the variable display result will be a small hit or a big hit Notification effect processing (239SGS365), when the effect mode described later is the second mode, during the variable display of the second special symbol in the time-saving state, to execute the effect corresponding to the fact that the effect mode is the second mode Second mode corresponding effect processing (239SGS366), V winning notification effect based on receiving V winning notification designation command from CPU 103 during small winning game (based on game ball passing third count switch 239SG024B After executing the V winning notification effect process (239SGS367) for executing the effect of notifying that it will be controlled to the big win game state after the end of the small win game, one of the processes of S170 to S177 is executed.

FIG. 10-25 is a flow chart showing an example of the panel display effect processing (239SGS363) executed by the effect control CPU 120. FIG. In the panel display effect processing shown in FIG. 10-25, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the panel display effect executing flag indicating that the panel display effect is being executed is set (239SGS371). .

If the panel display effect execution flag is not set (239SGS371; N), it is determined whether the effect mode is the first mode (239SGS372). In addition, in this characteristic portion 239SG, the first mode and the second mode are preset as production modes, and the first mode is a mode in which the panel display production can be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state. is. In addition, the second mode is a production different from the panel display production during the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state (for example, by operating the push button 31B, etc., the variable display result will be a big hit or a small hit. production) can be executed. These production modes can be selected by the player's operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A at the end of the jackpot game, which will be described later. When the effect mode is set to the second mode, the effect control CPU 120 executes the above-described second mode corresponding effect processing (239SG366) to produce a different effect from the panel display effect (second mode corresponding effect). ) should be executed.

When the effect mode is not the first mode (239SGS372; N), the panel display effect execution flag is ended, while when the effect mode is the first mode (239SGS372; Y), the game state designation command is received. (239SGS373). Whether or not the game state designation command is received may be determined by whether or not the game state designation command reception flag is set.

If no game state designation command is received (239SGS373; N), the panel display effect processing is terminated. On the other hand, when there is a game state designation command received (239SGS373; Y), the jackpot type of the previous big hit is specified and stored from the game state designation command (239SGS374). For example, when the received game state designation command is the second game state designation command, the immediately preceding jackpot type is specified as jackpot A and stored, and when the received game state designation command is the third game state designation command The immediately preceding big win type is specified and stored as the big win B, and when the received game state designation command is the fourth game state designation command, the immediately preceding big win type is specified and stored as the big win C, and the received game state designation is performed. When the command is the fifth game state designation command, the immediately preceding big win type is specified and stored as the big win D, and when the received game state designation command is the sixth game state designation command, the immediately preceding big win type is the big win E. is specified and stored.

Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type specified in the processing of 239SGS374 is jackpot A or jackpot B (239SGS375). If the identified jackpot type is one of jackpot C to jackpot E (239SGS375; N), the panel display effect processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the specified jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (239SGS375; Y), a panel display effect execution flag is set (239SGS376), and display of the panel display screen on the image display device 5 is started. Then (239SGS377), the panel display rendering process is terminated.

In addition, when the panel display effect execution flag is set (239SGS371; Y), the panel pattern determined flag in the entry of the buffer number 2-0 in the start winning command buffer 239SG194A239SG194A indicates that it has been determined. It is determined whether 1 is set (239SGS379).

If the panel pattern determined flag in the entry of buffer number 2-0 is not set to 1 (239SGS379; N), check the start winning command buffer 239SG194A (239SGS380), buffer number 2-0 It is determined whether or not the entry has memory of a pattern designating command (239SGS381). If the entry of the buffer number 2-0 does not store the pattern designation command (239SGS381; N), the panel display rendering process is terminated. On the other hand, when the entry of the buffer number 2-0 stores the pattern designation command (239SGS381; Y), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type specified at 239SGS374 is the jackpot B (239SGS382).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A (239SGS382; N), the display pattern of the corresponding panel during variable display is determined based on the symbol designation command stored in the entry of buffer number 2-0 (239SGS383). In the processing of 239SGS383, the display pattern of the corresponding panel during variable display is changed to pattern PN- according to whether the symbol designation command stored in the entry of buffer number 2-0 indicates a big win, a small win, or a loss. 1 to pattern PN-4 are determined at different ratios.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-26(A), when the pattern designation command indicates a big hit, the display pattern of the corresponding panel during variable display is determined to be pattern PN-1 at a rate of 0%. Then, the pattern PN-2 is determined at a rate of 0%, the pattern PN-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, and the pattern PN-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Also, if the symbol designation command indicates a small hit, the display pattern of the corresponding panel during variable display is determined to be pattern PN-1 at a rate of 20%, and pattern PN-2 at a rate of 30%. , the pattern PN-3 is determined at a rate of 50%, and the pattern PN-4 is determined at a rate of 10%. Then, when the pattern designation command indicates a failure, the display pattern of the corresponding panel during variable display is determined to be pattern PN-1 at a rate of 55%, and determined to be pattern PN-2 at a rate of 34%, The pattern PN-3 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the pattern PN-4 is determined at a rate of 1%.

As shown in FIG. 10-26B, pattern PN-1 is a display pattern for displaying an image of character A on the image display device 5, and pattern PN-2 is a display pattern for displaying character B on the image display device 5. pattern PN-3 is a display pattern for displaying an image of character C on the image display device 5; pattern PN-4 is a display pattern for displaying an image of character D on the image display device 5. This is a display pattern for

That is, in the characteristic portion 239SG, the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit (big hit expectation) is set to be the highest when the character D is displayed on the image display device 5 as the panel corresponding to the variable display. When the character C is displayed on the display device 5, the degree of expectation for the big win is set to be the second highest after the case where the character D is displayed, and when the character A is displayed on the image display device 5, the degree of expectation for the big win is the highest. It is set low (expectation of big hit for each character displayed on image display device 5 as corresponding panel during variable display: character D>character C>character B>character A).

Returning to FIG. 10-25, after executing 239SGS383, the effect control CPU 120 sets the panel pattern determined flag in the buffer number 2-0 to 1 (239SGS384), and changes the corresponding panel during variable display of the determined display pattern. After starting the display on the image display device 5 (239SGS385), proceed to 239SGS395.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is the jackpot B (239SGS382; Y), the panel pattern determined flag in the buffer number 2-0 is set to 1 (239SGS386), and the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot B is completed. After starting the display of the corresponding character D corresponding panel on the image display device 5 (239SGS387), the process proceeds to 239SGS395.

In addition, when the panel pattern determined flag in the entry of the buffer number 2-0 is set to 1 (239SGS379; Y), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type specified in 239SGS374 is the jackpot B (239SGS388 ). When the jackpot type is jackpot B (239SGS388; Y), the process proceeds to 239SGS395 as it is. ), it is determined whether or not there is memory of a symbol designation command in any of the entries corresponding to the second special figure pending storage of buffer numbers 2-1 to 2-4 (239SGS390). When there is no entry in the second special figure reservation storage in which the symbol designation command is stored (239SGS390; N), the process proceeds to 239SGS395 as it is. On the other hand, if there is an entry of the second special figure pending storage in which the symbol designation command is stored (239SGS390; Y), the panel pattern determined flag of the entry is set to "1" indicating that it has been determined. (239SGS391).

If the panel pattern determined flag is set (239SGS391; Y), the process proceeds directly to 239SGS395. On the other hand, when the panel pattern determined flag is not set (239SGS391; N), the display pattern of the panel corresponding to the second special figure reserved memory is determined based on the pattern designation command stored in the entry (239SGS392 ), the panel pattern determined flag of the entry is set to 1 (239SGS393). Then, the display of the second special figure pending storage corresponding panel in the display pattern determined in the process of 239SGS393 is started (239SGS394), and the process proceeds to 239SGS395.

In addition, in the processing of 239SGS392, the display pattern of the panel corresponding to the second special figure pending storage may be determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 239SGS383 processing and 239SGS392 processing, the display pattern of the corresponding panel during variable display and the display pattern of the second special figure pending storage corresponding panel may be determined at different ratios.

In 239SGS395, the process data corresponding to the variation pattern set at the start of the variable display being executed is checked (239SGS395). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the panel display effect (239SGS396), and if it is not the end timing (239SGS396; N), the panel display effect processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is the end timing (239SGS396; Y), the display of the panel display screen and the display of each panel in the image display device 5 are ended (239SGS397), and the panel display effect execution flag is cleared ( 239SGS398), the panel display effect execution flag is terminated.

FIG. 10-27 is a flow chart showing an example of the result image display process (239SGS365) executed by the effect control CPU 120. FIG. In the result image display process shown in FIG. 10-27, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the effect mode is set to the first mode (239SGS400). When the effect mode is the second mode (239SGS400; N), the result image display process is terminated. When the effect mode is the first mode (239SGS400; Y), whether the result image display timer is operating (239SGS401).

When the result image display timer is not in operation (239SGS401; N), it is determined whether or not the effect control process flag is 3, that is, whether or not the special prize waiting process (S173) is being executed. (239SGS402).

If the effect control process flag is not 3 (239SGS402; N), the result image display process is terminated. On the other hand, when the effect control process flag is 3 (239SGS402; Y), the jackpot type stored in the process of 239SGS374 of the panel display effect process is referred to, and the jackpot type (just before specified from the game control command (239SGS403).

When the jackpot type of the previous jackpot game specified from the game control command is any one of jackpot A to jackpot C (239SGS403; N), the result image display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the jackpot type of the jackpot game immediately before specified from the game control command is jackpot D or jackpot E (239SGS403; Y), refer to the remaining second special figure time saving notification command received immediately before (remainder Identify the remaining second special figure time saving number indicated by the second special figure time saving number notification command), whether the remaining second special figure time saving number is 0 or 92, that is, the timing is the second special in the time saving state It is determined whether or not it is time to complete the seventh variable display of the symbols (239SGS404).

And, when the remaining second special figure time saving number of times is not 0 or 92 (239SGS404; N), the result image display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the remaining second special figure time saving number of times is 0 or 92 (239SGS404; Y), set the value corresponding to the time of 19.5 seconds to the result image display period timer timer count (timer operation) (239SGS405), the number of big hits and the number of won prize balls counted in the number of big hits and the number of won prize balls counting process, that is, the number of times that the jackpot game state was controlled during the above-mentioned consecutive game period and the consecutive game period The display of the result image including the number of prize balls paid out is started (239SGS406), and the result image display process is terminated.

In addition, 19.5 seconds set in the result image display period timer in 239SGS405 means the symbol determination period (10 seconds) for the seventh second special symbol variable display in the time-saving state after the jackpot D jackpot game ends, Variable display period of the second special symbol up to 4 times after the end of the time saving state (2 seconds × 4), and design confirmation period of the variable display of the 2nd special symbol three times after the end of the time saving state (0.5 is the period based on the sum of seconds x 3).

Also, if the result image display timer is in operation (239SGS401; Y), after the result image display period timer is updated by subtracting 1 (239SGS407), whether or not the result image display timer after the subtraction update has timed out. (239SGS408).

When the result image display timer has not timed out (239SGS408; N), by ending the result image display process, the display of the result image is continued, while when the result image display timer has timed out At (239SGS408; Y), the display of the result image is terminated (239SGS409), and the result image display processing is terminated.

That is, in the present characteristic portion 239SG, the variable display result does not become a small hit or a big win in the time saving state after the big win D or big win E is finished (even if it becomes a small win, V winning does not occur). When finished, a result image is displayed on the image display device 5 . In addition, in the time saving state of the big hit E, even in the time saving state, the result image is displayed even when the variable display of the second special symbol is completed seven times.

FIG. 10-28 is a flow chart showing an example of the background image update process shown in FIG. 10-24. In the background image update process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the game state by the value of the remaining second special figure time saving number of times, the value of the effect control process flag, and the like (239SGS411).

Then, it is determined whether the specified game state is either a big win game state or a small win game state (239SGS412).

If it is either the big win game state or the small win game state (239SGS412; Y), the background image update process is terminated, and if it is neither the big win game state nor the small win game state (239SGS412; N) Furthermore, it is determined whether or not it is a normal state in which time saving control is not performed (239SGS413).

When the specified game state is the normal state (239SGS413; Y), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (239SGS413a). It should be noted that whether or not the second special symbol is being variably displayed may be determined by, for example, whether or not each command is stored in the entry of the buffer number 2-0 of the start winning command buffer 239SG194A. . When the second special symbol is being variably displayed (239SGS413a; Y), the background image update process is terminated, and when the second special symbol is not being variably displayed (239SGS413a; N), the pending storage of the second special symbol is It is determined whether or not there is (239SGS413b). It should be noted that whether or not there is a pending memory of the second special symbol may be determined by whether or not each command is stored in the entry of the buffer number 2-1 of the start winning command buffer 239SG194A.

If there is a pending memory of the second special symbol (239SGS413b; Y), the background image update process is terminated, and if there is no pending memory of the second special symbol (239SGS413b; N), the first background image is displayed. It is determined whether it is in (239SGS414). If the first background image is being displayed (239SGS414; Y), the background image update process is terminated. After the image is updated and displayed (239SGS415), the background image update process ends. As a result, the first background image is displayed on the image display device 5 when the game state is the normal state.

Also, if the specified game state is not the normal state (239SGS413; N), it is determined whether or not the effect control process flag is 2, that is, whether or not the effect process during variable display is being executed ( 239 SGS416).

When the effect control process flag is 2 (239SGS416; Y), refer to the remaining second special figure time saving number notification command received immediately before (remaining second special figure indicated by the remaining second special figure time saving number notification command Specify the number of times of time saving), and determine whether the remaining second special figure time saving number of times is 88 (239SGS417).

When the remaining second special figure time saving number of times is not 88 times (239SGS417; N), the background image update process is terminated, and when the remaining second special figure time saving number of times is 88 times (239SGS417; Y), during execution The fluctuation pattern of the variable display is PA3-3, that is, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach out of which the special figure fluctuation time is 15 seconds (239SGS418). If the variation pattern of the variable display being executed is not PA3-3 (239SGS418; Y), the background image update process is terminated; if the variation pattern of the variable display being executed is PA3-3 (239SGS418; Y), Furthermore, the control contents of the process data for variable display being executed are specified (239SGS419), and it is determined whether or not it is time to update the first background image (239SGS420). If it is time to update to the first background image (239SGS420; Y), the background image is updated to the first background image and the background image update process ends (239SGS421).

On the other hand, if it is not the update timing to the first background image (239SGS420; N), it is determined whether it is the update timing to the second background image (239SGS422), and if it is the update timing to the second background image, (239SGS422; Y), the background image is updated to the second background image, and the background image update process ends (239SGS423). If it is not time to update to the second background image (239SGS422; N), the background image update process is terminated.

Also, if the production control process flag is not 2 (239SGS416; N), if the remaining second special figure time saving number of times is not 88 times (239SGS417; N), if the variation pattern is not PA3-3 (239SGS418; N) , determines whether or not the second background image is being displayed (239SGS422). Then, if the second background image is being displayed (239SGS422; Y), the background image update process is terminated. 2 After updating to the background image (239SGS423), the background image update process is terminated.

By executing the background image update process in this way, when the game state is the normal state, the image is displayed when the second special symbol is not being variablely displayed and when the second special symbol is not stored in the pending memory. A first background image is displayed on the device 5 , and a second background image is displayed on the image display device 5 when the gaming state is the time-saving state. Further, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times in the time saving state after the big win E is finished, the second special symbol is variablely displayed seven times in the time saving state after the big win D is finished. A result image is displayed on the image display device 5 as in the case of execution. Then, when the eighth variable display of the second special symbol is started in the time saving state, the background image is temporarily updated from the second background image to the first background image in the image display device 5, and then changed to the second background image again. Updated.

10-29 is a flow chart showing an example of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is set, that is, whether or not the first variable display start command is received (239SGS431). . When the first variable display start command reception flag is set (239SGS431; Y), the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning time reception command buffer 239SG194A , are shifted upward by one buffer number (239SGS432). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Further, when the first variable display start command reception flag is not set (239SGS431; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is set, that is, whether the second variable display start command is received. (239SGS433). If the second variable display start command reception flag is set (239SGS433; Y), the buffer number of the second special figure pending storage in the start winning time reception command buffer 239SG194A "2-0" to "2-4" various command data and various flags stored in association with are shifted upward by one buffer number (239SGS434). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

If the second variable display start command reception flag is not set (239SGS433; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated.

After executing 239SGS432 or 239SGS434, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (239SGS435), and the stop design of the decorative design according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area. is determined (239SGS436).

Also, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the game state is the normal state (239SGS437). Whether or not the gaming state is the normal state may be determined by whether or not the second special figure time saving number of times notification command is received. When the gaming state is the normal state (239SGS437; Y), the notice effect determination processing (239SGS438) for deciding the execution of the notice effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit during the variable display is executed, and the process returns to 239SGS439. Advance, if the game state is the time saving state (2309SGS437; N), it proceeds to 239SGS439 without executing the processing of 239SGS438.

At 239SGS439, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach out PA3-3 with a special figure variation time of 15 seconds, based on the variation pattern designation command read at 239SGS435. do. If the variation pattern of the variable display is not PA3-3 (239SGS439; N), the variation pattern of the variable display is any of PA3-5, PB3-3, and PC3-3 with a special figure variation time of 50 seconds. (239SGS440).

If the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of PA3-5, PB3-3, and PC3-3 (239SGS440; Y), whether or not the game state is a time-saving state after the jackpot game of jackpot A is completed. (239SGS441). It should be noted that whether or not the game state is the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A may be determined by the jackpot type stored in 2390SGS374 of the panel display effect processing. When the game state is the time-saving state after the jackpot game of jackpot A is finished (239SGS441; Y), the number of times of variable display of the second special symbols controlled to these variation patterns and the time-saving state is one time. 239SGS448 (239SGS442).

On the other hand, if the game state is not the time saving state after the jackpot game of jackpot A is finished (239SGS441; N), it is further determined whether or not the game state is the time saving state after the jackpot game of jackpot B is finished (239SGS443). ). Incidentally, whether or not the game state is the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B may be determined by the jackpot type stored in 2390SGS374 of the panel display effect processing. When the game state is the time-saving state after the jackpot B jackpot game ends (239SGS443; Y), according to the fact that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol controlled to these variation patterns and the time-saving state is three times. 239SGS448 (239SGS444).

Also, if the variation pattern is PA3-3 in 239SGS439, the process table (time reduction state during variable display V stock notification effect process table for notifying that the variable display result will be a big hit or a small hit (V stock (V winning) occurs) in any of the variable display of the second special symbol controlled by Select to go to 239SGS448 (239SGS447).

In addition, even when the V stock notification effect is executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed 99 times (more precisely, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed 92 times after the variable display of the second special symbol is performed 7 times). 2 variable display of special symbols), there is a very small probability that the variable display result will be out. Therefore, in the process of 239SGS447, instead of selecting the process table for the V stock notification effect, an effect is provided that suggests that the variable display result will be a big win or a small win in any of the variable displays of the second special symbols. A process table may be selected for execution.

In addition, when the variation pattern is a variation pattern other than PA3-5, PB3-3, and PC3-3 in the processing of 239SGS440 (239SGS440; N), after the end of any one of the big hits C to E in the processing of 239SGS443 (239SGS443; N), select a process table corresponding to each variation pattern and proceed to 239SGS448.

In 239SGS448, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table.

Each process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, and control of sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). ing.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (239SGS449). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characterizing portion 239SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decoration pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern designation command (239SGS450). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (239SGS451). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172) (239SGS452).

Incidentally, in the effect processing during variable display, the values of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are each decremented by one. Then, the effect device is controlled according to the value of the process timer, the variable display of the decorative pattern is realized as described above according to the value of the variable display control timer, and the decorative pattern is realized according to the value of the variable display time timer. Stop the variable display and set the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (S173).

As described above, the performance control CPU 120 executes each process, and as shown in FIG. 10-30, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed 7 times in the time saving state after the big hit D is finished. In this case, when the seventh variable display of the second special symbol is completed and the game state is controlled to the normal state, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed for 2 seconds after the symbol determination period of 10 seconds. It is executed 4 times with a symbol fixing period of 0.5 seconds. In addition, 19.5 over the symbol determination period of 10 seconds, the variable display period of the second special symbol of 4 times each of 2 seconds, and the symbol determination period after the variable display of the second special symbol of 0.5 seconds each Seconds, the image display device 5 displays the result image.

After the game state is controlled to the normal state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is completed four times at maximum, the background image displayed on the image display device 5 changes from the second background image to the first background image. Updated. After that, as a normal state, variable display of the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball into the first start winning opening is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-31, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times in the time saving state after the jackpot game of jackpot E is finished, the seventh variable display of the second special symbol is performed. When is finished, while the game state is maintained in the time-saving state, the variable display of the second special pattern for 2 seconds is performed three times after the pattern fixing period of 10 seconds, each with a pattern fixing period of 0.5 seconds in between. be. It should be noted that these 10-second pattern confirmation period and the variable display period of the second special pattern of three times each 2 seconds (variable display period of the 8th to 10th second special pattern after being controlled to the time-saving state) and each A design determination period after the end of the variable display of the second special design for 0.5 seconds, and a period of 0.5 seconds from the start of the 11th variable display of the second special design after being controlled to the time saving state. A result image is displayed on the image display device 5 for 19.5 seconds.

In the 11th variable display after the game state is controlled to the time saving state, the variable display of the second special symbol (variable display by the variation pattern PA3-3) is executed for 15 seconds if the variable display result is wrong. be. During the variable display, the display of the result image displayed on the image display device 5 is terminated when 0.5 seconds have passed since the variable display was started, and the background image is changed from the second background image to the first background image. Update the background image once. Then, after a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has passed, the background image is updated again from the first background image to the second background image, and the second special symbol controlled to the time saving state during the variable display is variable. A V stock notification performance is started to notify that the variable display result will be a big win or a small win in any of the displays (V stock (V winning) will occur).

That is, as shown in FIGS. 10-30 and 10-31, in the characteristic portion 239SG, in the time saving state after the big hit D and the time saving state after the big hit E are finished, the number of times is 7 times. After the variable display of the two special symbols is completed, the same effect (display of the result image on the image display device 5 and updating of the background image from the second background image to the first background image) is executed. Then, the time-saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot D ends by executing the variable display of the second special symbol seven times (the game state is controlled to the normal state), whereas the jackpot E of the After the jackpot game is finished, the V stock notification effect is executed even after the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times, and the time saving state is continued.

Furthermore, since the number of rounds of the big win D and the big win E in the characteristic part 239SG is set to be the same, the player can select the type of the big win game executed by winning V during the small win game (jackpot game state of the big win D). and the jackpot game state of jackpot E) is difficult to discriminate (see FIG. 10-6 (E)).

Therefore, in the time-saving state after the jackpot game state of the jackpot D and the jackpot game state of the jackpot E are finished, whether the time-saving control is continued after the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not.

FIG. 10-32 is a flow chart showing an example of the advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-29. In the announcement effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (239SGS461). Then, based on the specified variable display result and variation pattern, the presence or absence of execution of the announcement effect and the effect pattern are determined (239SGS462).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-33(A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 10%, and the pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%. Determine the execution of the notice effect in , determine the execution of the notice effect in pattern YE-2 at a rate of 40%, decide the execution of the notice effect in pattern YE-3 at a rate of 15%, and 5% Execution of the advance notice effect in pattern YE-4 is determined at a ratio of .

In addition, if the variable display result is a failure and the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (super reach is a failure), 49% of the time it decides not to execute the notice effect, and 30% of the time it determines the pattern. Decide to execute the notice effect in YE-1, decide to execute the notice effect in pattern YE-2 at a rate of 15%, and decide to execute the notice effect in pattern YE-3 at a rate of 5%. , determines execution of the advance notice effect in pattern YE-4 at a rate of 1%.

In addition, if the variable display result is a failure and the variation pattern is a normal reach variation pattern (normal reach is a failure), 80% of the time it determines not to execute the notice effect, and 15% of the time it determines the pattern YE-. Determine the execution of the notice effect in 1, decide the execution of the notice effect in the pattern YE-2 at a rate of 5%, decide the execution of the notice effect in the pattern YE-3 at a rate of 0%, 0 Execution of the announcement effect in pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of %.

In addition, if the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (if it is non-reach loss), the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%, and the pattern at a rate of 5% Determine the execution of the notice effect in YE-1, decide the execution of the notice effect in pattern YE-2 at a rate of 0%, and decide the execution of the notice effect in pattern YE-3 at a rate of 0%. , determines the execution of the announcement effect in pattern YE-4 at a rate of 0%.

As shown in FIG. 10-33(B), pattern YE-1 is an effect pattern in which characters "chance!" YE-3 is an effect pattern in which the words "Hot!" , and pattern YE-4 is an effect pattern in which the image of character D is displayed on the image display device 5 instead of the dialogue.

In other words, as the advance notice effect in the characteristic portion 239SG, the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit (big hit expectation) is set to be the highest when the character D is displayed on the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 is displayed as the line in , the ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit is set to be high next to the case where the character D is displayed. When the image display device 5 displays "Chance!" Expectation of big hit: Character D > “Extremely Hot!” > “Hot!” > “Chance!”).

That is, in the advance notice effect of the characteristic portion 239SG, the character D is displayed on the image display device 5 in the same way as when the panel display effect is executed, so that the player can be made to recognize that the degree of expectation for the big win is the highest. , it is possible to improve the game interest.

Returning to FIG. 10-32, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the advance notice effect has been determined in the process of 239SGS462 (239SGS463). When the execution of the notice effect is determined (239SGS463; Y), the decided effect pattern of the notice effect is stored (239SGS464), and the notice effect start waiting timer is set to finish the notice effect determination process (239SGS467). .

Incidentally, the notice effect is determined by subtracting 1 from the value of the notice effect start waiting timer each time the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display, and is determined based on the fact that the notice effect start waiting timer times out. A process table for notice effect corresponding to the effect pattern of the notice effect is selected, and a process timer for notice effect is started. Thereafter, the value of the process timer for notice effect is decremented by -1 each time the effect process during variable display is executed, and the value of the process timer for notice effect is varied in the image display device 5 according to the content of the process data corresponding to the value of the process timer for notice effect. A command may be output to the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to the pattern.

10-34 is a flow chart showing an example of the ending rendering process shown in FIG. In the ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the ending effect process timer is in operation (239SGS461). When the ending effect process timer is not in operation (239SGS461; N), the ending effect process table is selected (239SGS462) and the ending effect process timer is started (239SGS463). Then, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1), the production device (image display device 5 as a production component, production component Various lamps, speakers 8L and 8R, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) as parts for effects are executed, and the ending effect process is terminated (239SGS464).

If the ending effect process timer is in operation (239SGS461; Y), the value of the ending effect process timer is decremented by 1 (239SGS465), and it is determined whether or not the ending effect process timer has timed out. (239SGS466). When the ending effect process timer has timed out (239SGS466; Y), it is further determined whether or not the ending effect process timer that has timed out is the last ending effect process timer (239SGS467). When the ending effect process timer that has timed out is not the last ending effect process timer (239SGS467; N), the process data is switched (239SGS468). That is, the ending effect process timer is restarted by setting the next ending effect process timer set value in the ending effect process table to the process timer (239SGS469). In addition, based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data, input control execution data, etc. included in the process data set next, the production device (parts for production) (239SGS470) and go to 239SGS472.

Also, when the ending effect process timer has not timed out at 239SGS466 (239SGS466; N), the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the circle die group effect process timer (239SGS471), and the process proceeds to 239SGS472. move on.

At 239SGS472, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the finished jackpot game is the jackpot game of jackpot A or jackpot B (239SGS472). If the finished jackpot game is one of jackpot C to jackpot E (239SGS472; N), end the ending production process, and if the finished jackpot game is jackpot A or jackpot B ( 239SGS472;Y), as shown in FIGS. 10-35(A) and 10-35(B), displays a message indicating that the effect mode can be changed on the image display device 5 during the ending effect, Effect mode determination processing for accepting the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A and determining the effect mode from the first mode and the second mode is executed (239SGS473).

Then, in 239SGS467, if the ending effect process timer that has timed out is the last ending effect process timer (239SGS467; Y), the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process. (239SGS474) to end the ending effect processing.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 when it is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game in the characteristic portion 239SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-36 to 10-38. First, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 (A) and 10-36 (B), when the first mode is selected as the production mode, after the jackpot game of jackpot A is completed, An image display device 5 displays an operation prompting image for prompting the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by hitting the game ball toward the passing gate 41 to generate a normal game hit. At this time, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started by the game ball entering the second start winning hole, the image display device 5 starts to display the panel display screen. At this time, the first panel displayed as the panel display effect is a character corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol being executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-36(C), when the game ball wins in the second starting winning hole, the display of the panel of the character corresponding to each reserved memory of the second special symbol is started. At this time, the character (panel) displayed according to each reserved memory of the second special symbol is determined by the ratio shown in FIG. It is not limited to this, and the character (panel) displayed according to each reserved memory of the second special symbol may differ according to the order of the reserved memories that have occurred. For example, the rate at which pattern PN-4 is determined as the panel display pattern when targeting the fourth reserved memory of the second special symbol (character D for the fourth reserved memory of the second special symbol panel display ratio) is set higher than the ratio at which pattern PN-4 is determined as the panel display pattern when targeting the first to third pending memories of the second special symbol. Thus, the player may be made to pay attention to whether or not the variable display result will be a big win or a small win in the fourth variable display of the second special symbol.

10-36(D) to 10-36(F) when a maximum of 5 panels are displayed on the image display device 5 by winning a plurality of game balls in the second start winning hole. Thus, the panel display screen and the display of each panel are finished, and the decoration pattern becomes the reach. Then, the reach effect is started.

In the ready-to-win effect, for example, a battle effect in which a friend character and an enemy character fight is executed. When the variable display result is a failure, as shown in FIG. 10-36(G), the fact that the friend character is defeated by the enemy character as a result of the battle presentation informs that the variable display result is a failure. be. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a small win or a big win, as shown in FIG. You will be notified that you are out.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-36 (G), if the variable display result is lost and the variable display ends, the variable display of the second special symbol for the reserved memory (up to 4 times) 10-36(E) to FIG. 10-36(H), the ready-to-win effect is executed.

In addition, when the variable display result becomes a small win or a big win in any of the variable displays of the second special symbols a maximum of five times in total, it is controlled to a big win game state of any one of the big wins C to big wins E. (If the variable display result is a small win, the occurrence of V winning during the small win game is a condition).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-37 (A) and 10-37 (B), when the first mode is selected as the effect mode, after the jackpot game of jackpot B is over, An image display device 5 displays an operation prompting image for prompting the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by hitting the game ball toward the passing gate 41 to generate a normal game hit. At this time, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started by the game ball entering the second start winning hole, a big hit A is generated in response to the variable display of the second special symbol being executed on the image display device 5. A panel of the character D (a panel corresponding to the character D for the time saving state after the big win B is finished) having a size larger than the panel display effect in the time saving state after the big win game is finished is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-37(C) and 10-37(D), when the display of the panel corresponding to the character D is completed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the decorative pattern becomes ready-to-win. After the decorative pattern becomes a ready-to-win, the variable display on the image display device 5, the variable display based on the first reserved memory of the second special pattern, and the second reserved second special pattern are displayed on the image display device 5 as win/fail notification effects. An operation promoting image of the push button 31B corresponding to each variable display based on memory is displayed.

When the player operates the push button 31B three times while the push button 31B operation prompting image is being displayed, the variable display, the variable display based on the first reserved memory of the second special symbol, If any of the variable display results of the variable display based on the second reserved memory of the second special symbol is lost, as shown in FIG. It is notified that the variable display result of all displays is a miss.

At this time, in the image display device 5, an operation is performed again to prompt the player to hit the game ball toward the passage gate 41 to generate a normal game hit and to enter the game ball into the second start winning hole. A promotional image is displayed. Then, after all three variable displays of the second special symbol controlled to the time saving state are completed, as shown in FIG. A panel display effect may be executed for the variable display corresponding to the pending storage of the generated maximum four second special symbols. In this case, as the panel display effect, the first panel is a panel indicating that the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the character D panel has already been completed three times (for example, the character D is marked with a cross). ) may be displayed to make the player pay more attention to whether or not the remaining variable display results of the second special diagram up to four times will result in a small win or a big win.

On the other hand, when the player operates the push button 31B three times while the push button 31B operation promotion image shown in FIG. If the variable display result of either the variable display based on the second reserved memory or the variable display based on the second reserved memory of the second special symbol is a small hit or a big hit, it is shown in FIG. 10-37 (G) As a result of the success/failure notification effect, it is notified that the variable display result will be a small hit or a big hit in one of these three variable displays.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-38(A), after the jackpot game D or E is finished, the game ball is launched toward the passage gate 41 for the player to generate a normal game hit. The image display device 5 displays an operation prompting image prompting the user to enter the game ball into the second start winning hole. In the time-saving state, the image display device 5 displays a second background image (for example, a nighttime background image shown in FIG. 10-38(B)) indicating that the gaming state is the time-saving state.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-38 (B) and 10-38 (C), when the variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is executed seven times, the image display device continues for 19.5 seconds. At 5 the result image is displayed. When the seventh variable display of the second special symbol is the variable display of the second special symbol in the time-saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot D is finished, that is, the seventh variable display of the second special symbol ends. When the game state is controlled from the time saving state to the normal state, as shown in FIGS. 10-38 (C) and 10-38 (D), the image display device 5 displays the result image and the second background image is displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed up to four times. Then, after the game state is controlled to the normal state, the fourth variable display of the second special symbol is completed (after the jackpot game D is completed, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed up to 11 times. The display of the result image on the image display device 5 ends based on the fact that the second background image has been completed), and the second background image is updated to the first background image.

On the other hand, when the seventh variable display of the second special symbol is the variable display of the second special symbol in the time-saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot E is finished, that is, the seventh variable display of the second special symbol. 10-38 (D) and 10-38 (E), as shown in FIG. 10-38 (D) and 10-38 (E), the result image and the second background image in the image display device 5 is displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed three times (8th to 10th variable display of the second special symbol after the jackpot game of the jackpot E is finished). Then, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (F), when the variable display of the second special symbol for the eleventh time after the end of the jackpot E is started, the display of the result image is finished, and the second background is displayed. The image is updated with the first background image. Furthermore, after the background image is updated to the first background image, the V stock notification effect is executed in the image display device 5, and the background image is updated to the second background image again. Note that the V stock notification effect executed in the characteristic portion 239SG is the same effect as the V winning notification effect described above, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the V stock notification effect is the same as the V stock notification effect. The effect may be partially different from the prize notification effect (for example, the characters displayed, the sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the light emission patterns of the LEDs may be different).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 239SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 (C) and 10-37 (B), once the second special symbol In a time-saving state intended for variable display, the panel of characters A to C can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a panel display performance, while the second special pattern is displayed three times after the big win B is finished. In the time-saving state intended for variable display, the image display device 5 can display the panel of the character D (the panel corresponding to the character D for the time-saving state after the big win B is finished). In other words, since the panel of the character displayed as the panel display effect is different according to the number of times the second special symbol is variablely displayed in the time saving state, the interest in the time saving state can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 239SG, in a time-saving state intended for variable display of the second special symbol once after the jackpot game of jackpot A is finished, panels of characters A to D can be displayed as a panel display effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the time-saving state intended for variable display of the second special symbol once after the jackpot game of jackpot A is finished, the panel display is performed. Only the panels of the characters A to C can be displayed as a performance, and the panel of the character D is displayed as the panel display performance only when the variable display of the second special pattern three times after the big win B is finished. It may be possible.

In addition, in this characteristic part 239SG, when the variable display result is a big win and the big win type is the big win B, the big win game state is controlled to the big win B without being controlled to the small win game state, and the big win B is made. A panel corresponding to the character D is displayed on the image display device 5 in a time saving state for variable display of the second special pattern three times after the end of the game, depending on the time saving state after the end of the big win game of the big win B, so that it is variable. When the display result is the big win and the big win type is the big win B, the time-saving state after the big win game of the big win B is finished can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-36 (C), in the time-saving state after the jackpot game of jackpot A is finished, the panel of characters A to D can be displayed as a panel display effect on the image display device 5, and the panel is displayed. When the character D is displayed as the display effect, the ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit is set higher than when the character A to the character C are displayed, so the time-saving state after the big win game of the big win A is finished. It is possible to improve the interest in the game by displaying the panel of the character D as the panel display effect in .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-35, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect mode determination process during the ending effect after the end of the big win A or the big win B, so that the effect mode is changed to the first mode by the operation of the player. A mode and a second mode can be selected. When the production mode is set to the first mode, the panel display production is executed in the time saving state, while when the production mode is set to the second mode, the second mode is supported in the time saving state. An effect (for example, an effect of notifying that the variable display result will be a big hit or a small hit by operating the push button 31B or the like) is executed. That is, in the present characteristic portion 239SG, the player can select the effect to be executed in the time saving state, so that the interest of the effect in the first mode and the second mode can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 239SG, after the big win A big win game is over, it is controlled to a time saving state for variable display of the second special symbol once, and after the big win B big win game is over, the second special symbol is displayed three times. It is in a time-saving state for variable display of patterns. Then, in the time-saving state targeting the variable display of the second special symbol three times, the variable display of the second special symbol three times (variable display of the second special symbol being executed as the first variable display and variable display based on the reserved memory of the second special symbol that occurred during the variable display), and the variable display result is small in any of the three variable displays of the second special symbol. Since it is possible to notify a win or a big win, it is possible to further improve interest in a time-saving state targeted for variable display of the second special pattern three times after the end of the big win B big win game. It is possible.

In addition, in the success/failure notification effect of this characteristic portion 239SG, as shown in FIG. , the form that can notify that the variable display result will be a small hit or a big hit in any of the three times of variable display of the second special symbol has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. As for the number of times the push button 31B is operated as the notification effect, a case of only one time or only two times may be provided. For example, when the variable display results in the variable display of the second special symbol being executed are a big win or a small win, the first operation of the push button 31B informs that the variable display result will be a big win or a small win, In the variable display based on the reserved memory of the first second special symbol (the second variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state), if the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit, the second push button 31B is pressed. Notifies that the variable display result will be a big hit or a small hit by operation, and the variable display result in the variable display based on the reserved memory of the second second special symbol (variable display of the third second special symbol in the time saving state) is a big hit or a small hit, the third operation of the push button 31B may inform that the variable display result will be a big hit or a small hit.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-29, 10-32 and 10-33, when the game state is the normal state, a notice effect is executed to suggest that the variable display result will be a big hit during the variable display. When the image of the character D is displayed on the image display device 5 as the advance notice effect, it is more likely than when the lines such as "chance!", "hot!", and "hot!" Since the variable display result becomes a big hit at a high rate, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the character D is displayed on the image display device 5 not only in the panel display performance but also in the advance notice performance, thereby increasing the interest of the game. can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 239SG, a form in which the notice effect can be executed during the variable display only when the game state is the normal state has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect during the variable display is , it may be possible to execute during the variable display even when the game state is the time saving state.

In addition, in this characteristic part 239SG, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot D is finished, the game state is controlled to the normal state, but the jackpot E is hit. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed 7 times in the time saving state after the game is finished, the V winning notification effect and the effect mode are performed in the 11th variable display of the second special symbol after being controlled to the time saving state. Since the same V stock notification performance is executed, the time saving state is a time saving state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed 99 times, and the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the remaining second special symbols. Since the player can recognize that the probability of a small win is extremely high (easily controlled to a big win game state), the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-22 (B), the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) opens and closes for 8 seconds, while as shown in FIG. 10-23 (B), time saving Since the pattern fixing period of the last variable display of the state is set to 10 seconds which is the second period, if a normal pattern hit occurs during the variable display of the last second special pattern in the time saving state and the game ball becomes possible to win in the second starting winning port, the opening and closing of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed before the first variable display of the second special symbol is started after the game state is controlled to the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the second special symbol from being excessively executed when the game state is controlled from the time saving state to the normal state.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-30 and 10-31, in the time-saving state after the jackpot D jackpot game is finished, the pattern confirmation period of the seventh second variable display of the second special pattern, and after the jackpot E jackpot game is finished In the time-saving state, the second special symbol variable display symbol fixing period for the seventh time is set to 10 seconds, which is the second period. When the variable display of the second special symbol is completed for the first time, the player recognizes whether or not the time saving state has not ended yet (whether the time saving state is the time saving state after the jackpot game E is finished). You can prevent it from being done.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-31, in the time-saving state after the jackpot game of jackpot E is finished, the variable display of the second special pattern is executed seven times, and then the second special pattern is reserved and stored. The variable display of the second special symbol is executed four times corresponding to the number, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed for the fourth time after executing the variable display of the second special symbol seven times (controlled to the time saving state 11th variable display of the second special symbol since then), the second background image displayed on the image display device 5 is once updated to the first background image, and the background image is updated to the first background image. Since the V stock notification performance is executed based on the lapse of the predetermined period, it is possible to inform the player that the time saving state is still continuing while making the player think that the game state has been once controlled to the normal state. You can improve your interest.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-11, 10-12, 10-19 (B) and 10-20, in the time-saving state after the jackpot D jackpot game is finished, the seventh variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the game state is controlled to the normal state, while the variable display of the second special symbol is executed up to 4 times with a special symbol variation time of 2 seconds, the time after the big win E is finished is reduced. After the variable display of the second special symbol is executed for the seventh time in the state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed a maximum of four times with a special symbol variation time of 2 seconds, so that the special symbol variation time is different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the time saving state is still continuing after the variable display of the second special symbol is executed seven times.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. be

For example, in the characterizing portion 239SG, an embodiment is illustrated in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the variable display result is a big hit at a rate of 1 in the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a pachinko game in which one of a plurality of set values with different jackpot probabilities can be set in the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. The present invention may be applied to the gaming machine 1 . In this case, it is possible to execute both the advance notice effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit during the variable display and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. When a performance with a high degree of expectation for a big win is executed as the advance notice performance, the setting suggestion performance may be executed at a higher rate than when a performance with a low degree of expectation for the big win is executed as the advance notice performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-39 to 10-44 as a modified example 239SG-1, in the variable display start process, the rear variable as an effect to be executed in the latter half of the variable display (for example, during the ready-to-win effect) Rear variable display suggestive effect determination processing for determining whether or not to execute suggestive effect during display, and front variable as effect to be executed in the first half of variable display (for example, during the period from the start of variable display to reaching reach) Effect control CPU 120 executes a suggestive effect determination process during rear variable display for determining whether or not to execute a suggestive effect during display.

FIG. 10-39 is a flow chart showing the suggestive effect determination process during the rear variable display in the variable display start setting process. 10-39, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the startup winning command buffer 239SG194A to specify the value of the pending display flag corresponding to the variable display (239SGS501). The pending display flag is a flag for displaying the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory on the image display device 5, and is stored in association with each entry in the start winning command buffer 239SG194A. . In this process, when the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the value of the pending display flag of the entry "1-0" of the start winning reception command buffer 239SG194A is specified, and the second variable display start command reception flag is set. If the display start command reception flag is set, the entry "2-0" in the start winning reception command buffer 239SG194A may be specified.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display and the effect to be executed as the suggestive effect during the variable rear display based on the value of the reserved display flag specified in 239SG301 (239SG502).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-40(A), when the value of the pending display flag specified in 239SGS501 is "0", that is, the pending display notice effect is executed for the variable display. If not, 90% of the ratio determines non-execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, 10% determines the execution of the jackpot suggestive effect as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, and 0% of the ratio determines the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. Execution of setting suggesting effect is determined as suggesting effect during variable display. In addition, when the value of the pending display flag specified in 239SGS501 is "1" or "2", that is, the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. If it is, the non-execution of the suggestion performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 50%, the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance as the suggestion performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 50%, and the performance of the suggestion performance during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 0%. Execution of setting suggesting effect is determined as suggesting effect during rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the value of the reserved display flag specified in 239SGS501 is "3", that is, if the reserved memory display is displayed by the blue camera as the reserved display notice effect for the variable display, 30 % determines non-execution of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display, determines the execution of the jackpot suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the variable rear display at the ratio of 35%, and determines the execution of the suggestive performance during the variable rear display at the ratio of 35%. Determines execution of the setting suggestion effect. Then, if the value of the pending display flag specified in 239SGS501 is "4", that is, if the pending memory display is displayed by the red camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display, 0 % determines non-execution of suggestive performance during variable rear display, 30% determines execution of jackpot suggestive performance as suggestive performance during variable rear display, and 70% as suggestive performance during variable rear display. Determines execution of the setting suggestion effect.

That is, in the characterizing portion 239SG of the present embodiment, when the pending display forewarning effect is executed for the variable display, it is more likely than when the pending display forecast effect is not executed for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a high rate. Furthermore, when the pending memory display is displayed by a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "3" or "4"), Higher than when the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "1" or "2") It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined by a ratio, and the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that execution of the setting suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than in the case.

Also, attention is paid to the case where the pending memory display is displayed with a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "3" or "4"). Then, if the pending memory display is displayed on the red camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display, the pending memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined at a higher rate than when it was displayed as a camera, and the pending memory display is a blue camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the set suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when it is displayed in .

From the above, in the characteristic part 239SG of the present embodiment, when the pending memory display is displayed in a square or star shape as the pending display notice effect for the variable display, as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display While it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the big hit suggestive effect is executed, the pending memory display is displayed by a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. In this case, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the setting suggesting effect is executed as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the pending memory display is displayed on the red camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display, the pending memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display. Since the ratio of execution of the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display is higher than in the case where it is displayed as a rear variable display, the game is more concerned with whether the setting suggesting effect is executed as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display. It is designed to attract people's attention.

Returning to FIG. 10-39, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during rear variable display has been determined in the process of 239SGS502 (239SGS503). If it is decided in the process of 239SGS502 not to execute the suggestive effect during variable rear display, the process of deciding suggestive effect during variable rear display is terminated. , 239SGS502, it is determined whether or not execution of a jackpot suggestive effect is determined as a suggestive effect during rear variable display (239SGS504).

In the processing of 239SGS502, when it is determined to execute a big hit suggestive effect as a suggestive effect during the rear variable display, the effect pattern of the big hit suggestive effect is determined and stored based on the result of the variable display, and the suggestive effect determination process during the rear variable display is performed. End (239SGS505).

Incidentally, as the effect pattern that can be determined in the process of 239SGS505, as shown in FIG. 10-40(B), a total of three effect patterns from pattern AS-1 to pattern AS-3 are provided. Of these production patterns, pattern AS-1 is a production pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to a big win (big hit expectation) is the lowest, and pattern AS-2 is: This is a production pattern (expectation for big win: medium) that suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to the big win is higher than that of the pattern AS-1, and the pattern AS-3 has the highest ratio of the variable display result to the big win. This is a production pattern that suggests high (big hit expectation: high).

Then, in the process of 239SGS505 described above, as shown in FIG. 10-41, when the variable display result is a big hit, the production control CPU 120 sets the production pattern of the big hit suggestion production at a rate of 10% to the pattern AS-1. , pattern AS-2 is determined at a rate of 30%, and pattern AS-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

On the other hand, in the process of 239SGS502, when it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the RAM 122 and refers to the setting value specified command received from the CPU 103 (Pachinko game machine 1 (239SGS506). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stores the effect pattern of the setting suggesting effect based on the specified set value, and ends the suggesting effect determination processing during rear variable display (239SGS507).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-40(B), a total of five patterns from pattern SS-1 to pattern SS-5 are provided as determinable effect patterns in 239SG307. Among these patterns SS-1 to SS-5, pattern SS-1 suggests the possibility that the set value is an odd number (for example, 1, 3, 5), and pattern SS-2 suggests the possibility that the set value is an even number ( For example, 2, 4, 6), pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an odd-numbered intermediate setting or higher (for example, 3 or 5), pattern SS-4 indicates that the setting value may be an even intermediate setting or higher (eg, 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the setting value may be the highest setting (eg, 6).

Patterns SS-1 and SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any one of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that the set value is either 5 or 6 (high setting). It is assumed that the degree of expectation of being either is low, and for pattern SS-3 and pattern SS-4, when the set value is either 5 or 6, it is determined at a high rate, so that the set value 5, It is said that expectations for being 6 are high.

In addition, in this modification 239SG-1, setting values 1 to 4 are set low and setting values 5 and 6 are high setting, but setting values 1 to 3 are low setting and setting values 4 to 6 are high setting Alternatively, setting values 1 and 2 may be set low, setting values 3 and 4 may be medium settings, and setting values 5 and 6 may be high settings, and the performance pattern execution ratio may be set.

In the process of 239SGS507 described above, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern to the pattern SS- 1, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-3 at a rate of 9%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 6%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 0% Decide on SS-5. Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the production pattern at a rate of 25%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, and 6 The pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of 9%, the pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 9%, and the pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 50%, determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%. SS-3 is determined at a rate of 10%, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 10%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the production pattern at a rate of 20%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 50%, and the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 50%. %, pattern SS-3 is determined, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%, and determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%. %, pattern SS-3 is determined, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the production pattern at a rate of 30%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and 15 %, the pattern SS-3 is determined, the pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 5%.

As described above, in this modification 239SG-1, the setting value suggesting effect is executed in pattern SS-1 or pattern SS-2, thereby suggesting that the setting value is any one of 1 to 4. It is suggested that the set value is 5 or 6 by executing the value suggesting effect in patterns SS-3 and SS-4. Then, when the setting suggesting effect is executed in the pattern SS-5, the set value of 6 is determined.

FIG. 10-43 is a flow chart showing the suggestive effect determination process during the front variable display executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process. 10-43, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result of the variable display (239SGS511). In addition, it is determined whether or not execution of the setting suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during rear variable display (239SGS512).

When the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance is determined as the rear variable display suggestion performance, whether or not to execute the front variable display suggestion performance and the front variable display suggestion based on the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance and the result of the variable display The effect to be executed as the effect is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (239SGS513). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-44(A), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 40%, and at a rate of 30%. determines execution of a character performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display, and determines execution of a timer performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display at a rate of 30%. Also, if the result of the variable display is a failure, 70% of the decisions are made to not execute the suggestive effect during the variable front display, and 25% of the decisions are made to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the variable front display. Execution of the timer effect is determined at a rate of 5% as the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part.

In other words, in the case where the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss. Execution of suggestive performance is determined, and when the result of variable display is a big win, execution of character performance and execution of timer performance are determined at the same rate as suggestive performance during front variable display, while variable display result. In the case of a failure, execution of the character performance is determined at a higher rate than execution of the timer performance as a suggestive performance during the front variable display. is set.

In addition, when execution of the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display is determined, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggesting effect and the suggesting effect during the front variable display based on the result of the variable display. The effect to be executed as the presence/absence and suggestive effect during front variable display is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (239SGS514). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-44(B), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 30%, and at a rate of 0%. determines the execution of the character performance as the suggestive performance during the front variable display, and determines the execution of the timer performance as the suggestive performance during the variable front display at a rate of 70%. In addition, when the result of the variable display is a failure, 80% of the decisions are made to not execute the suggestive effect during the variable front display, and 0% of the decisions are made to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the variable front display. Then, execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the front variable display at a rate of 20%.

In other words, when it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, if the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss. It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect is determined and the execution of the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display is not determined regardless of whether the result of the variable display is a big win or a loss. That is, the degree of expectation for a big hit in the timer effect is set higher than the degree of expectation for a big win in the character effect.

For this reason, when the variable display result is a big hit, execution of the timer effect is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss, so it is suggested during the front variable display. When the timer effect is executed as the effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result is a big win.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-43, after executing 239SGS513 or 239SGS514, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during front variable display is determined (239SGS515). When it is decided not to execute the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the process of deciding the suggestive effect during the variable front display is terminated, and when the execution of the suggestive effect during the variable front display is determined, the front is further processed. It is determined whether or not execution of a character presentation has been decided as a suggestive presentation during variable display (239SGS516).

When it is determined to execute a character presentation as a suggestive presentation during front variable display, the presentation pattern of the character presentation is determined and stored based on the result of the variable display, and the suggestive presentation determination processing during variable front display is completed. (239SGS517).

As the effect patterns of the character effect that can be determined in the processing of 239SGS517, as shown in FIG. 10-44(C), a total of two effect patterns, pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2, are provided. . Of these production patterns, pattern CS-1 is a production pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the variable display result by displaying the character A (not shown) on the image display device 5 has the lowest probability of winning a big hit. Pattern CS-2 is an effect pattern suggesting that the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit by displaying a character B (not shown) on the image display device 5 is higher than pattern CS-1 (expectation for big win: medium ).

For this reason, in the process of 239SGS517, as shown in FIG. 10-45(A), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern of the character effect to the pattern CS-1 at a rate of 20% when the variable display result is a big hit. , and the pattern CS-2 is determined at a rate of 80%. On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, the pattern CS-1 is determined as the effect pattern of the character effect at a rate of 80%, and the pattern CS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Further, when execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the timer effect based on the effect determined to be executed as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. is determined and stored, and the suggestive effect determination process during variable part display ends (239SGS518).

As effect patterns of the timer effect that can be determined in the processing of 239SGS518, as shown in FIG. 10-44(C), a total of two effect patterns, pattern TS-1 and pattern TS-2, are provided. Of these effect patterns, pattern TS-1 suggests that the percentage of variable display results that result in a big hit in image display device 5 is higher than pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of character effects (expectation for big win: high). ) together with the pattern TS-2 indicates the period until the start of execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, together with the image of the character X, for 25 seconds. is higher than the pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of the character production (big hit expectation: high), and the period until the execution of the rear variable display suggestive production is started with the image of the character Y for 25 seconds. (See Fig. 10-45(C)).

Therefore, in the processing of 239SGS518, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. The pattern is determined to be pattern TS-1 80% of the time, and pattern TS-2 20% of the time. In addition, when the suggestive effect during rear variable display whose execution has been determined is the set suggestive effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80%, and the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 20%. Decide on 2.

That is, when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2 rather than the pattern TS-1 (that is, the timer In the case where the performance period of the performance is long and the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 rather than the character A, the ratio of executing the set suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is set higher. Therefore, in the modified example 239SG-1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the character displayed on the image display device 5 and the effect period of the timer effect. Further, when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, the player can expect the setting suggesting effect to be executed more than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to improve the game interest.

As described above, in this modification 239SG-1, as shown in FIG. The expectation of a big hit is set higher than when the production is executed, and the suggested production is set as the suggested production during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character production is executed as the suggested production during the front variable display. It is now running.

As shown in FIGS. 10-39 to 10-46, when it is determined to execute the front variable display suggesting effect during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines in the variable display effect process (S172). Process data corresponding to the effect pattern of the suggestive effect during front variable display may be set, and the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer in the subsequent effect process during variable display (S172). Further, when it is determined to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the timer for waiting for the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display by 1 each time the effect processing during the variable display is executed. Then, based on the value of the waiting timer for starting the suggestive performance during the rear variable display becoming 0, the process data corresponding to the performance pattern of the determined suggestive performance during the variable rear display is set. Then, the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data according to the process timer in the effect process during variable display (S172).

In addition, in the characteristic portion 239SG, in the time-saving state after the jackpot E jackpot game ends, V Although the stock notification performance is executed and the player is notified that the time saving state is the time saving state after the jackpot game E is finished, the present invention is not limited to this. , As a modification 239SG-2, in the time-saving state after the end of the big hit game of the big win E, for example, the game ball wins the variable winning ball device 6B during the period when the result image is displayed on the image display device 5 (new A special notification for notifying that the time-saving state is the time-saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot E is finished as a performance different from the V-stock notification performance in response to the establishment of the condition such as the occurrence of the starting prize. The production may be made executable.

In this way, when the time-saving state after the big win E is over, the same result image as when the time-saving state after the big win D is over is displayed. During the period, it is informed that the working hours saving state is the working hours saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot E is finished in accordance with the occurrence of the start winning of the second special pattern, so that the game interest can be improved. Further, when the result image is displayed on the image display device 5, the special notification effect is not executed unless the game ball wins the variable winning ball device 6B. That is, since the player can select whether or not to execute the special notification effect, it is possible to widen the range of game selection and improve the game interest.

In addition, in the modification 239SG-2, both the V stock notification effect and the special notification effect can be executed in the time-saving state after the jackpot E is finished, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, only the special notification effect out of the V stock notification effect and the special notification effect may be executable in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the big win E is finished.

Further, in this modification 239SG-2, a form is provided in which a special notification effect can be executed in response to the winning of a game ball in the variable winning ball device 6B while the result image is being displayed on the image display device 5. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a special notification effect may be executed in response to a game ball winning the variable winning ball device 6B at any timing.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 239SG, an example has been illustrated in which the panel display effect is executed in the time-saving state after the end of the big win A or big win B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big win A or big win. Even when the big win D or E big win game is controlled via the small win based on the variable display of the second special pattern after the big win game B ends, the panel display performance is executed in the time-saving state after the big win game ends. You may When the panel display effect is executed in the time saving state after the jackpot D or E jackpot game is finished, the panel display effect is started from the last variable display in the time saving state, and the variable display and the game state are executed. The panel display effect may be executed over the variable display of the second special symbol up to three times after is controlled to the normal state. In particular, as the panel display performance, from the last variable display of the time saving state, the panel in the time saving state after the big win A is finished on the image display device 5 in the same way as the time saving state after the big win B is finished. A panel of character D having a size larger than the display performance (a panel corresponding to character D for a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B) is displayed, and the variable display and the game state are controlled to the normal state, and then executed. A panel corresponding to the character D is displayed on the image display device 5 as a panel display effect by executing the winning/failure notification effect for the variable display of the second special symbol three times (holding storage of the three second special symbols). In this case, it is possible to further increase the ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit or a small hit.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 175SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characterizing portion 175SG in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-1 to 11-13. FIG. 11-1 is a diagram illustrating variation patterns. FIG. 11B is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns. In FIG. 11-3, (A) is a diagram showing the table for determining the advance notice effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of the notice effect. 11-4, (A) to (C) are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the advance notice effect. 11-5, (A) to (D) are diagrams showing the structure of effects of super reach α1, α2, β1, β2. 11-6, (A) to (H) are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of super reach α1. 11-7, (A) to (H) are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of super reach β2. In FIG. 11-8, (A) is a diagram comparing the contents of the front-stage production and the rear-stage production, and (B) is a timing chart showing the display state of lines. 11-9, (A) is a timing chart showing changes in display, sound, and light output levels in normal reach, and (B) is a diagram showing the content of reach titles. 11-10, (A) to (H) are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the front stage effect and the rear stage effect. 11-11, (A) is a diagram showing a change mode in the switching effect, (B) is a diagram comparing the advance notice effect and the switching effect, and (C) is a diagram comparing the display period of the notice effect and the switching effect. is. 11-12, (A) to (H) are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the switching effect. 11-13, (I) to (L) are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the switching effect.

In the following, configurations having the same functions as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the characteristic portion 239SG or having different forms, arrangement positions, etc., are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Differences from the pachinko game machine 1 explained in section 239SG will be mainly explained.

(fluctuation pattern)
As shown in FIG. 11-1, among the variation patterns of the first special symbols in the characteristic portion 175SG, the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach production of normal reach (normal reach production) is executed For the special figure variable display time, super reach are set shorter than super reach α1, α2 and super reach β1, β2, which are super reach variation patterns in which the reach effect (super reach effect) is executed. In addition, regarding the special figure variable display time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach effects of super reach such as super reach α1, α2, super reach β1, β2 are executed in this characteristic part 175SG, the super reach of super reach β1, β2 The variable pattern in which the ready-to-win effect is executed is set to have a longer special figure variable display time than the variable pattern in which the ready-to-win effect of the super reach α1 and α2 is executed.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 175SG, the variable display result is "big win" in order of super reach β2, super reach β1, super reach α2, super reach α1, and normal reach. And in the super reach variation pattern, the longer the variation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

FIG. 11-2 is an explanatory diagram of a method of determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the characteristic portion 175SG. In this characteristic portion 175SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is varied according to the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of reserved memories, and the game state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-2, if the variable display result is a big hit (non-time saving), select the big hit variation pattern determination table A and use the big hit variation pattern determination table A PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach α2 jackpot) and PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot) Either variation pattern) or PB1-5 (super reach β2 jackpot variation pattern) is determined.

Also, if the variable display result is a big hit (time saving), select the big hit variation pattern determination table B, and use the big hit variation pattern determination table B to set the variation pattern to PB1-6 (non-reach big hit variation pattern).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-1 (non-reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α1 fluctuation pattern) and PA2 -3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α2), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β1) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2) is determined.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3 or more, select the variation pattern determination table B for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 loss). Any one of PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of loss of super reach α2), PA2-4 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β1) and PA2-5 (variation pattern of loss of super reach β2) is determined.

Also, if the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table C for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table C for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-3 (Shortened fluctuation pattern for time saving without non-reach) is determined.

That is, if the variable display result in the present characteristic portion 175SG is "off", the number of pending storage of the variable special figure is 3 or more, or based on the time saving state, the special figure variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach-out variation pattern (PA1-1), the rate of variable display is increased by the shortening variation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3), so the game is slowed down. While preventing this, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 11-1, the variable display of super reach α1 (variable display of fluctuation patterns PA2-2 and PB1-2) in this characteristic portion 175SG is a special figure variable display time of 40 seconds, and the super This is a variable display in which a battle effect in which a friend character A (see FIG. 11-4(A)) and an enemy character (not shown) battle (show off) is executed as a ready-to-win effect. The variable display of super reach α2 (variable display of fluctuation patterns PA2-3, PB1-3) has a special figure variable display time of 50 seconds, and a friend character B (see FIG. 11-4 (B)) as a super reach effect. This is a variable display in which a battle effect between the character and the enemy character is executed. Variable display of super reach β1 (variable display of fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PB1-4) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and a friend character C (see FIG. 11-4 (C)) as a super reach effect. This is a variable display in which a battle effect between the character and an enemy character (not shown) is executed. The variable display of super reach β2 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-5 and PB1-5) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and three friendly characters A, B, and C and enemy characters as a super reach effect. It is a variable display in which a battle effect with (not shown) is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-2, the degree of expectation of a big hit of each variable display in this characteristic portion 175SG is set so that the degree of expectation of a big hit of super reach β2 is the highest. Reach α2, super reach α1, normal reach, and non-reach are set in order of high hit expectation (jackpot expectation in each variable display in this feature part 175SG: super reach β2> super reach β1> super reach α2> super reach α1>normal reach>non-reach).

In other words, focusing on the variable display of Super Reach, in this characteristic portion 175SG, the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on which of the allied characters A to C is the allied character that appears in the ready-to-win production. Degree: Character C > Character B > Character A).

(Notice production)
In this characterizing portion 175SG, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the notice effect in the variable display in the notice effect determination process (see step 239SGS462 in FIG. 10-29). In the present characterizing section 175SG, in the notice effect determination process, only a step-up notice effect (also referred to as an SU notice effect) in which the notice image changes step by step as described later is determined. These advance notice effects include, but are not limited to, advance notice effects other than step-up notice effects, such as character notices in which the aforementioned characters appear, and group notices in which a group of predetermined characters cross the display area. etc. may be determined, and in the case of determining the notice effect of these different aspects, the timing to start the notice effect differs according to the form of the notice effect, so a timer to wait for the start of notice effect to be described later is set. , different periods may be set according to the mode of the advance notice effect.

Then, along with extracting a random number for determining the advance notice effect, the presence or absence of execution of the notice effect and the type of the notice effect in the case of execution are determined using the table for determining the type of notice effect shown in FIG. 11-3(A). .

Incidentally, in this characteristic portion 175SG, the random number for determining the advance notice effect is a random number in the range of 1 to 100, and any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. In other words, the number of determination values of the random numbers for determining the notice effect is set to 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of these random numbers for determining the notice effect can be set as appropriate. You just have to decide. In addition, a random number counter for determining the previous notice effect for generating these random numbers for determining the previous notice effect is set in the RAM 122, and the random number counter for determining the previous notice effect is updated for each timer interrupt in random number update processing.

As shown in FIG. 11-3(B), in this characterizing portion 175SG, as the advance notice effects, a notice effect A (see FIG. 11-4(A)) in which the character A appears, and after the character A appears, the character A notice effect B in which B appears (see FIG. 11-4(B)) and a notice effect C in which character C appears after character A and character B appear (see FIG. 11-4(C)) are executed. It is possible.

In the notice effect type determination table, as shown in FIG. , If the variable display result is a big hit, if the variation pattern is a reach loss, and if the variation pattern is a non-reach loss, each different judgment value is the number of judgment values shown in FIG. 11-3 (A) are assigned so that

Specifically, when the variable display result is a big hit, 10 determination values are assigned to the "non-execution" of the notice effect, and 20 determination values are assigned to the "notice effect A". 30 determination values are assigned to the "notice effect B", and 40 determination values are assigned to the "notice effect C". In addition, when the variation pattern is out of reach, 10 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" of the notice effect, 40 determination values are assigned to "notice effect A", and " Thirty determination values are assigned to the "notice effect B", and twenty determination values are assigned to the "notice effect C". In addition, when the variation pattern is non-reach out, 80 determination values are assigned to the "non-execution" of the notice effect, and 10 determination values are assigned to the "notice effect A", Six determination values are assigned to the "notice effect B", and four determination values are assigned to the "notice effect C".

By assigning the determination value in this way, when the variable display results in a big hit, the announcement effect is more likely to be executed than when the super reach or the normal reach is lost. In the case of a big hit, the ``notice effect C'' is likely to be executed, in the case of the out of reach, the ``notice effect A'' is likely to be executed, and in the case of the non-out of the reach, ``non-execution'' is determined. It's getting easier.

By setting in this way, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when the advance notice effect is executed than when the advance notice effect is not executed. Furthermore, in the advance notice effects, the degree of expectation for a big win is higher when the advance notice effects C are executed than when the advance notice effects A and B are executed. In other words, the advance notice effect is a suggestive effect suggesting that the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 of a plurality of types of characters A to C are switched and displayed to be controlled to the jackpot game state.

The degree of expectation (reliability) of each of the advance notice effects A to C is the probability that each advance notice effect will be executed and result in a big hit. It is a numerical value divided by the sum of the probability of not getting a big hit (probability of execution of each advance notice effect).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of any of the advance notice effects has been determined, that is, whether or not any one of the “prediction effect A”, the “prediction effect B”, and the “prediction effect C” has been determined. If none of the "notice effect A", "notice effect B", and "notice effect C" has been decided, that is, if "non-execution" is decided, the notice effect determination process is performed. exit. On the other hand, when any one of "notice effect A", "notice effect B", and "notice effect C" is decided, the type of the decided notice effect is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122, and the notice effect execution determination flag is set. After turning on, the notice effect determination process is terminated.

(Direction composition of Super Reach)
Next, the effect configurations of super reach α1, α2, β1 and β2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-5 to 11-13.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 175SG, not only the variable display of super reach α1, α2, β1, β2, but also the predetermined timing (for example, Allied characters A to C and enemy characters (not shown) appear before the ready-to-win display mode, after the ready-to-win display mode, etc., and the friendly characters A to C and the enemy characters (not shown) play some kind of game. (For example, a mini-game, etc.) can be executed, and depending on whether the friend character wins or loses the enemy character, the possibility of the variable display result being a "big win" is suggested, or a "big win" or You may be notified that you have become "lost".

In the variable display of super reach α1, α2, β1, and β2, friendly characters A to C and enemy characters (not shown) are displayed before the variable display mode becomes the reach display mode and after the variable display mode becomes the reach mode. The first half of the battle is performed, and without a conclusion, the shutter effect or blackout effect, which will be described later, is finally developed into the latter half of the battle as a super reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-5, in the variable display of super reach α1, α2, β1, and β2, which are super reach variation patterns, the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes the big win display result and the big win game state is entered. As a suggestive effect suggesting the possibility of being controlled, a normal ready-to-win effect is executed based on the change in the variable display mode to a ready-to-win display mode, and then the super ready-to-win effect is developed to execute the super ready-to-win effect. Further, the advance notice effect can be executed before the variable display mode becomes the ready-to-win display mode.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-5 (A) to (D), the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of decorative symbols in the variable display of super reach α1, α2, β1, and β2. When the predetermined time has passed since then, if execution of the announcement effect is decided, one of the announcement effects A to C is executed (see FIGS. 11-6(A) and 11-7(A)). Next, the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is changed to the ready-to-win display mode, and the normal ready-to-win effect is started (see FIGS. 11-6(B) and 11-7(B)).

In the normal reach effect, the first half of the battle effect in which the characters A to C battle with the enemy characters, and the shutter effect or blackout effect in which the predetermined image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 is difficult to see in the first half of the battle effect. A production (special production), a front production (first information display production) that is executed after the shutter production or the blackout production and displays the front line (first information), and a front production that is executed after the front line (first information). A post effect (second information display effect) for displaying a post dialogue (second information) different from the first information) is executed after the post effect, and the movable body 32 moves from the origin position above the image display device 5. and a movable object effect of falling (moving) to an effect position that overlaps the substantially central position on the front side of the display area of the image display device 5 is executed.

In addition, although it is not executed in super reach α1 and α2, in the case of super reach β1 and β2, a plurality of types of specific images (for example, each character A switching effect (special effect) for switching and displaying the character images corresponding to A to C) is executed.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 175SG, in the normal reach production of super reach α1, α2, β1, β2, the battle first half production, shutter production and blackout production (special production), front stage production (first information display production), and rear stage Although the form in which the production (second information display production) and the movable body production are executed, the later-described battle latter half production (super reach production A to D) is executed has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, as super reach other than super reach α1, α2, β1, β2 (for example, super reach γ, etc.), for example, after executing the battle first half production, shutter production, blackout production, front stage production, rear stage production , super ready-to-win γ, etc. in which the latter half of the battle effects (super ready-to-win effects A to D) are executed without executing the movable body effect may be executed. In this super reach γ, the super reach effect may be developed in the first half of the battle effect while the ally character is in an inferior state such as receiving damage. Furthermore, in the first half of the battle production, the normal reach production in which the ally character wins or loses is executed in the normal reach of the fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PB1-1 or the normal reach production of the fluctuation pattern different from the fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PB1-1. It may be possible.

(Notice production)
As shown in FIG. 11-6(A) and FIG. 11-7(A), the advance notice effect starts the variable display of decorative patterns based on one of super reach α1, α2, β1 and β2, and displays decorative patterns. Character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 of characters A to C corresponding to the determined performance type are displayed in the vicinity of the central decorative pattern display area 5C when the variable display of decorative patterns is performed in the areas 5L, 5C and 5R. It is a performance. The advance notice effect A ends after displaying the character image 175SG001 corresponding to the character A for a predetermined time, and the notice effect B displays the character image 175SG001 corresponding to the character A for a predetermined time, and then displays the character image 175SG002 corresponding to the character B. After displaying the character image 175SG001 corresponding to the character A for a predetermined period of time, the notice effect C switches to the character image 175SG002 corresponding to the character B and displays it for a predetermined period of time, and then displays the character C. It is switched to the character image 175SG003 to be displayed for a predetermined time, and then ends.

In this way, the notice effects A to C are suggestive effects suggesting the types of characters that appear in the battle first half effect and the battle latter half effect by switching and displaying a plurality of types of character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 (suggestive images). , is set so that the greater the number of characters to be switched and displayed, the higher the expectation of a big win (the expectation of a big win; advance notice effect C>prediction effect B>prediction effect A).

As shown in FIGS. 11-11(B) and (C), from the start of the display of the character image 175SG001 of the character A to the end of the display, or until the display of the next character image 175SG002 of the character B is started. is about 3000 ms, and the display time tf from the start of the display of the character image 175SG002 of the character B to the end of the display or until the start of the display of the next character image 175SG003 of the character C. is about 3000 ms, and the display time tf from the start of the display of the character image 175SG003 of the character C to the end of the display is about 3000 ms. are all displayed for the same time. The size of each character image 175SG001 is substantially the same, and the display color is a display color peculiar to each character.

The display time tf from when the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 of one character are displayed until when the character image of the next character is displayed is not limited to the above 3000 ms, and can be changed in various ways. is. Further, the display time tf may be set differently for each character. For example, the display time tf of the character image 175SG003, which has a high expectation of a big hit when it appears, is changed to the display time tf of the other character images 175SG001 and 175SG002. It may be set longer than the display time tf.

(First half of battle production)
In the first half of the battle production, as shown in FIGS. 11-6(B)(C) and 11-7(B), the variable display mode becomes the ready-to-win display mode, and a character image 175SG004 reading "reach!" It is started at the timing when the performance is started. Specifically, the character image 175SG001 corresponding to the friendly characters A to C and the character image 175SG005 of the enemy character appear to start a battle, and before the battle is settled, a shutter effect or a blackout effect, which will be described later, starts. It ends by being done. In other words, the result of the battle is carried over to the latter half production of the battle, which will be described later.

(Shutter effect and blackout effect)
As shown in FIG. 11-6(C), the shutter effect is displayed on the left and right sides of the display area of the image display device 5 when the first half of the battle effect is started in the variable display of decorative patterns based on super reach β1 and β2. , after a shutter image 175SG006 imitating a shutter is displayed in a mode of reciprocating movement in the horizontal direction, the shutter image 175SG006 in which the left and right shutters are closed is displayed as shown in FIG. 11-6(D). As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the variable display image of the decoration pattern and the character images 175SG001 and 175SG005 during execution, that is, it is an effect that makes it difficult to recognize the effect of the first half of the battle being executed.

In addition, when the shutter effect is started, the effect control CPU 120 changes the display image (decorative pattern variable display image, character images 175SG001, 175SG005, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 by the shutter image 175SG006. Visual recognition is made difficult, the display screen is darkened, the volume of the performance sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is lowered below the volume in the first half of the battle performance, and further, the game area, the movable body 32, By reducing the light intensity of various light-emitting means (e.g., LEDs, etc.) provided in the glass door frame and the frame 3 for the game machine to be lower than the light intensity in the first half of the battle production, the first half of the battle production is made difficult to recognize ( See FIG. 11-9(A)).

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-5, the shutter effect that makes it difficult to see the display area of the image display device 5 and lowers the sound volume and the amount of light is set for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the start of the shutter effect. seconds or 5 seconds) has elapsed, and the execution period ta2 of the shutter effect in the super reach α2 is set to be longer than the execution period ta1 of the shutter effect in the super reach α1. (ta1<ta2).

In the blackout effect, as shown in FIG. 11-7(C), when the first half of the battle effect is started in the variable display of decorative patterns based on super reach β1 and β2, the entire display screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. The black display state makes it difficult to visually recognize the variable display image of decorative symbols and character images 175SG001 and 175SG005 during execution, that is, it is an effect that makes it difficult to recognize the effect of the first half of the battle being executed.

In addition, when the blackout effect is started, the effect control CPU 120 controls the display image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in the form of a black screen (variable display image of decoration pattern, character images 175SG001, 175SG005, etc.). ) is made difficult to see, the display screen is darkened, the volume of the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is lowered below the volume of the normal reach effect, and the game area and the movable body 32 are added. , By reducing the light intensity of the production light of various light-emitting means (for example, LEDs, etc.) provided in the glass door frame and the frame 3 for the game machine to be lower than the light intensity in the first half of the battle production, the production in the first half of the battle is recognized. difficult (see Figure 11-9(A)).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-5, the blackout effect that makes it difficult to see the display image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and reduces the sound volume and the amount of light starts the blackout effect. After that, it continues until a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds or 9 seconds) has passed, and the execution period ta4 of the blackout effect in super reach β2 is the blackout effect in super reach β1. A time longer than the execution period ta3 is set (ta3<ta4).

Since the blackout performance execution periods ta3 and ta4 are set longer than the shutter performance execution periods ta1 and ta2, the longer the shutter performance and blackout performance execution periods are, the higher the expectation of the big hit is. (ta1=3 seconds<ta2=5 seconds<ta3=7 seconds<ta4=9 seconds). Therefore, the player expects the blackout effect to be executed for a longer period of time than the shutter effect, so that the player can continue to pay attention to the shutter effect and the blackout effect. In addition, in the execution periods ta3 and ta4 of the blackout effect, an indication effect that foretells the start of the preceding effect and the subsequent effect may be performed.

Further, as described above, the method for darkening the display screen of the image display device 5 is, if the image display device 5 is a liquid crystal display device, the light emitted forward from the backlight is blocked by the liquid crystal layer. It is only necessary to increase the blocking rate or decrease the light intensity of the backlight. Further, if the image display device 5 is an EL panel using organic electroluminescence (organic EL), the driving voltage may be lowered. In other words, the display screen of the image display device 5 can be darkened (displayed as a black screen) by setting the display screen to a low light emission state in which the amount of light output from the display screen of the image display device 5 is reduced. Reducing the brightness (output level) means reducing the amount of light output from the display screen.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-9(A), in the characteristic portion 175SG, the output amount (output level) of the brightness, sound volume, and light amount of the screen of the image display device 5 accompanies the start of the shutter effect or the blackout effect. is reduced, but the output amount is not set to "0" (for example, black screen display, mute, extinguished, etc.), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the screen of the image display device 5 At least one output amount of brightness, sound volume, and light amount may be set to "0" (eg, black screen display, mute, light off, etc.).

(First stage production and second stage production)
As shown in FIG. 11-6(E) and FIG. 11-7(D), the first stage effect is after any of the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 corresponding to the characters A to C appearing in the first half of the battle effect is displayed. , the contents of the lines spoken by the characters A to C are displayed as a character image 175SG007 in the display area of the image display device 5, and output as voice information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 11-6(F) and FIG. 11-7(E), the second-stage effect is to display the contents of the lines spoken by the character in the display area of the image display device 5 as a character image 175SG008 following the first-stage effect. At the same time, it is an effect of outputting audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 11-8(A), the content of the dialogue in the first stage production is based on the battle situation in the first half of the battle production (related to the first half of the battle production), and expresses the character's enthusiasm for the second half production of the battle. , The content of the dialogue in the latter stage production is the content that represents the special move that is planned to be performed in the latter half of the battle production.

Specifically, in the case of Super Reach α1, the line in the first stage production is "I'll do it quite well... I'll settle it next time!", and the line in the second stage production is "Strong attack!". In the case of Super Reach α2, the line in the front stage production is "The game is about to end...then it will be settled next time!", and the line in the rear stage production is "Super attack!". In Super Reach β1, the line in the first stage is "I'm not alone... I'll show you my true strength!", and the line in the second stage is "Ultra Attack!". In Super Reach β2, the line in the first stage is "You're not alone... I'll show you everyone's power!", and the line in the second stage is "Miracle Attack!".

In addition, the content of the lines in the front stage production and the rear stage production indicates that the expectation of victory (expectation of big hit) in the battle production is high in the order of super reach β2, super reach β1, super reach α2, and super reach α1. there is In other words, the first stage production is "I'm not alone...I'll show you everyone's power!", "I'm not alone...I'll show you my real power!" , "I'm going to do it pretty well ... I'll settle it next time!" , "Miracle Attack!"

As shown in FIG. 11-8(B), the dialogue for the front-stage effect and the dialogue for the rear-stage effect are output separately. In addition, the lines of the pre-stage production are a first period th1 from timing ti1 at which the pre-stage production is started to timing ti2 after a predetermined period of time has passed, a second period th2 from timing ti2 to timing ti3 after a predetermined period of time has passed, and The dialogue for the latter stage effect is divided into the first predetermined period th3 from the timing ti4 when the latter stage effect is started to the timing ti5 when the predetermined time has passed, and the time when the predetermined time has passed since the timing ti5. The second predetermined period th4 up to timing ti6 and output (display and sound) are divided into two.

Note that the first period th1, the second period th2, the first predetermined period th3, and the second predetermined period th4 all have the same length in the characteristic portion 175SG, but the length of each period is arbitrary and various. Therefore, for example, the execution period of the preceding stage effect (first period th1 + second period th2) and the execution period of the latter stage effect (first predetermined period th3 + second predetermined period th4) are different in length. good too.

In addition, although each of the first period th1, the second period th2, the first predetermined period th3, and the second predetermined period th4 has different periods, the present invention is not limited to this, and each period One of the periods may partially overlap with the other period. For example, the display of the character image 175SG007 in the second period th2 starts before the display of the character image 175SG007 in the first period th1 ends. may be

Specifically, the dialogue in the first stage of Super Reach α1 is the nine characters "I'll do it pretty well..." in the first period th1, and the nine characters "I'll settle it next time!" in the second period th2. is output. As for the lines of the pre-stage effect of super reach α2, 9 characters of "The game is about to start..." are output in the first period th1, and 9 characters of "Next is the end!" are output in the second period th2. As for the dialogue in the first stage of Super Reach β1, 7 characters "I'm not alone..." are output in the first period th1, and 11 characters "I'll show you my serious power!" are output in the second period th2. be. As for the dialogue in the first stage of Super Reach β2, the 7 characters "I'm not alone..." are output in the first period th1, and the 12 characters "I'll show you everyone's power!" are output in the second period th2. .

In addition, as for the lines of the latter stage effect of super reach α1, the five characters "strong" are output during the first period th1, and the five characters "attack!" are output during the second period th2. As for the lines of the latter stage effect of super reach α2, 4 characters "super" are output in the first period th1, and 9 characters "Attack!" are output in the second period th2. As for the lines of the latter stage effect of Super Reach β1, the four characters "Ultra" are output during the first period th1, and the four characters "Attack!" are output during the second period th2. As for the dialogue in the latter stage effect of Super Reach β2, four characters "Miracle" are output during the first period th1, and "Attack!" is output during the second period th2.

In the case of super reach α1, the number of characters (9 characters) displayed in the first period th1 is greater than the number of characters (5 characters) displayed in the first predetermined period th3, and the number of characters displayed in the second period th2 The number of characters (9 characters) is greater than the number of characters (5 characters) displayed during the second predetermined period th4. Further, the number of characters (9 characters) displayed in the first period th1 is larger than the number of characters (5 characters) displayed in the second predetermined period th4, and the number of characters (9 characters) displayed in the second period th2 ) is greater than the number of characters (5 characters) displayed in the second predetermined period th4.

In the case of super reach α2, the number of characters (9 characters) displayed in the first period th1 is greater than the number of characters (4 characters) displayed in the first predetermined period th3, and the number of characters displayed in the second period th2 The number of characters (9 characters) is greater than the number of characters (5 characters) displayed during the second predetermined period th4. Further, the number of characters (9 characters) displayed in the first period th1 is larger than the number of characters (5 characters) displayed in the second predetermined period th4, and the number of characters (9 characters) displayed in the second period th2 ) is greater than the number of characters (5 characters) displayed in the second predetermined period th4.

In the case of super reach β1, the number of characters (7 characters) displayed in the first period th1 is greater than the number of characters (4 characters) displayed in the first predetermined period th3, and is displayed in the second period th2. The number of characters (11 characters) is greater than the number of characters (5 characters) displayed during the second predetermined period th4. In addition, the number of characters displayed in the first period th1 (7 characters) is greater than the number of characters displayed in the second predetermined period th4 (5 characters), and the number of characters displayed in the second period th2 (11 characters) ) is greater than the number of characters (5 characters) displayed in the second predetermined period th4.

In the case of super reach β2, the number of characters (7 characters) displayed in the first period th1 is greater than the number of characters (4 characters) displayed in the first predetermined period th3, and is displayed in the second period th2. The number of characters (12 characters) is greater than the number of characters (5 characters) displayed during the second predetermined period th4. In addition, the number of characters displayed during the first period th1 (7 characters) is greater than the number of characters displayed during the second predetermined period th4 (5 characters), and the number of characters displayed during the second period th2 (12 characters). ) is greater than the number of characters (5 characters) displayed in the second predetermined period th4.

Thus, in each super reach α1, α2, β1, and β2, the number of characters displayed in the first period th1 is greater than the number of characters displayed in the first predetermined period th3, and the number of characters displayed in the second period th2 The number of characters displayed is greater than the number of characters displayed during the second predetermined period th4. Further, the number of characters displayed in the first period th1 is greater than the number of characters displayed in the second predetermined period th4, and the number of characters displayed in the second period th2 is displayed in the second predetermined period th4. more than the number of characters allowed. Furthermore, the number of characters displayed in the first period th1 and the second period th2 of the pre-stage effect is larger than the number of characters displayed in the first predetermined period th3 and the second predetermined period th4 of the post-stage effect.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-8(A), the display mode of the lines in the first stage production is different from the display mode of the lines in the second stage production. It is displayed in a display mode with a higher degree of emphasis than the mode.

For example, in the first stage effect, the background screen of the image display device 5 and the character image 175SG003 are displayed in a dark mode, and the character image 175SG007 consisting of a plurality of characters (eg, "I'm not alone...") is displayed during the first period th1. The character image 175SG007 is displayed in a manner (fade-in) that gradually becomes larger and brighter in the second period th2, and then consists of a plurality of characters (for example, "I'll show you everyone's power!"). In addition, it is displayed in a brighter mode (fade-in). Also, as shown in FIG. 11-10(C), after the character image 175SG007 (for example, "You're not alone... I'll show you everyone's power!") is displayed in the largest and brightest way, it gradually becomes smaller, In addition, it is displayed in a darkening mode (fade-out) and finally disappears. The character image 175SG007 may move while fading in or fading out.

On the other hand, in the second-stage effect, the background screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in a brighter mode than in the first-stage effect, and a plurality of character images 175SG008 (for example, "mi", "la", "ku", "ru") consisting of one character are displayed. ) is displayed (dynamically displayed) so as to move from the right side of the display screen to the center while rotating (frame-in) in the first predetermined period th3, and a plurality of character images 175SG008 ( For example, ``A'', ``Ta'', ``T'', ``Q'', and ``!'') are displayed (frame-in) so as to move while rotating from the lower side of the display screen toward the center during the second predetermined period th4 ( dynamic display). Further, as shown in FIG. 11-10(G), after the character image 175SG008 (for example, "Miracle Attack!") is displayed in the largest size and brightest, it moves radially outward. , and finally displayed in a mode of disappearing (frame-out) from the display screen.

Note that the character images 175SG008 displayed during the second predetermined period th4 are all the same characters of "Attack!", but may differ in color, form, etc. according to the type of super reach.

As shown in FIG. 11-8(A), the character image 175SG007 in the front stage effect is small, planar (two-dimensional), moves slowly (speed of change in display mode due to fade-in), and is displayed with low brightness. (See FIGS. 11-10 (A) to (C)). On the other hand, the character image 175SG008 in the second stage effect is larger than the character image 175SG007 in the first stage effect, has a three-dimensional shape (three-dimensional), has a fast movement (speed of change in the display mode due to frame-in (movement speed)), and has a high brightness. is displayed (see FIGS. 11-10 (E) to (G)).

Note that if the maximum size and brightness of the character image 175SG008 in the post-stage presentation are larger and brighter than the maximum size and brightness of the character image 175SG007 in the pre-stage presentation, the character image during fade-in and frame-in The size and brightness of a part of may have an inverse relationship. Also, although the contents of the lines are different between the front stage production and the rear stage production, at least part of the contents may be common.

In this way, the degree of emphasis is higher when the size of the character image that constitutes the serif is small, but when it is larger, the degree of emphasis is higher when the image is three-dimensional than when it is two-dimensional. It can be said that the higher the brightness is, the higher the degree of emphasis is than the lower the brightness is. In the above description, the size, form, movement, and brightness of the character image are exemplified in a form in which the degree of emphasis is higher in the latter stage than in the former stage. The degree of emphasis of at least one of the size, form, movement, and brightness of the character image should be higher than that of the character image in the preceding stage. In addition to the above, for example, the degree of emphasis is higher when the thickness of the character is thicker than when it is thin, and when the color is high when the saturation or brightness is low. good too. Furthermore, not only the display mode of the character image itself, but also a special image such as an effect image may be displayed around the character image to enhance the degree of emphasis.

Also, in super reach α1, α2, β1, and β2, the execution periods tb1 to tb4 of the pre-stage effects are all set to the same time, but they may be changed according to the type of super reach. In addition, although the execution periods tc1 to tc4 of the latter-stage effects are all set to be the same time, they may be changed according to the type of super ready-to-win.

(Switching effect)
As shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-13, the switching effect is after the first stage effect and before starting the second stage effect and the second half effect of the battle in the variable display of the decorative symbols based on the super reach β1 and β2. This is an effect of switching and displaying character images 175SG001-175SG003 (specific images) corresponding to a plurality of types of characters A-C. In addition, since the switching effect is executed in super reach β1, β2 and not executed in super reach α1, α2, either super reach effect C or super reach effect D, which will be described later, is executed. is reported.

In the switching effect, the character image 175SG001 corresponding to the character A is first displayed, then the character image 175SG002 is switched to the character image 175SG002 corresponding to the character B, and then the character image 175SG003 corresponding to the character C is switched and displayed. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-11(A), the switching effect is started after the preceding effect is completed, and the subsequent effect is started after the switching effect is completed. The display time of each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003 in the switching effect is a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms), and the display time of all the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 is the same in the characteristic portion 175SG. can be different. Also, the display time tg may be set differently for each character. For example, the display time tg of the character image 175SG003, which has a high expectation of a big hit when it appears, is changed to the display time tg of the other character images 175SG001 and 175SG002. It may be set longer than the display time tg.

Also, when the characters A to C start to be displayed, a blank image 175SG010 (see FIGS. 11-12(A), (E) and 11-13(I)) different from the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 is displayed. After that, each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003 is switched in a plurality of stages in the order of a small image, a medium image, and a large image so that each character A to C is gradually enlarged from the back side to the front side of the display screen. It is displayed (see FIGS. 11-12 (B) to (D), (F) to (H) and FIGS. 11-13 (J) to (L)). Although the blank image 175SG010 and the small, medium, and large images of the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 have the same display time tg (for example, 250 ms), the display time of each image may be different.

Also, for the small images and medium images of each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003 (see Figures 11-12 (B) to (C), (F) to (G) and Figures 11-13 (J) to (K)) , while displaying a gold line image, a blank image 175SG010 and large images of each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003 (FIGS. 11-12 (A), (D), (E), (H) and FIGS. 11-13 ( For I) and (L)), a blue image is displayed. In this way, the blank image 175SG010 displayed at the start stage of the plurality of stages, the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 displayed at the end stage, and the character images 175SG001 displayed at intermediate stages between the start stage and the end stage. 175SG003, by making the display mode different from the small image and the medium image, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the character image is changing and the timing at which the character type is switched.

In the switching effect, the blank image 175SG010 and the small, medium, and large images of the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 are reduced in visibility (for example, each image is masked). An image (for example, a pseudo light guide plate image) is superimposed on the front side of each image (for example, a pseudo light guide plate effect display layer, which is a layer with a higher display priority than a normal display layer that displays a normal effect image). A specific image effect (for example, a pseudo light guide plate effect) to be displayed may be made executable. By doing so, for example, when comparing the light guide plate effect by the light guide plate device arranged on the front side of the image display device 5 and the pseudo light guide plate effect, the pseudo light guide plate effect differs from the light guide plate effect. It is possible to perform a display similar to the light guide plate effect without lowering the visibility of the display. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to provide a light guide plate in the pseudo light guide plate presentation, it is possible to prevent an increase in the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine.

In the characteristic portion 175SG, the blank image 175SG010 displayed at the start stage is common to all of the characters A to C. good.

Also, although the small images and medium images of the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 are displayed in gold, they may be displayed in colors other than gold. Also, the blank image 175SG010 and the large images of the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 displayed at the end stage are displayed in blue, but they may be displayed in colors other than blue.

In addition, although each character image 175SG001 to 175SG003 has been exemplified as being enlarged in three steps in the order of small image, medium image, and large image, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be expanded in two steps or less or four steps or more. You may make it change in steps. Furthermore, the display modes such as the postures and expressions of the characters A to C may be changed while enlarging, or only the display colors may be changed without changing the display modes and sizes. Further, for example, character C (specific image) to be displayed last is displayed by switching one more step from FIG. Alternatively, the display time tg1 may be longer than the display times tg1 of the other characters A and B. Further, a plurality of types of switching display patterns are set as switching display patterns for the respective character images 175SG001 to 175SG003, one of the plurality of types of switching display patterns is determined for each of the characters A to C, and the determined switching display. Display may be performed based on the pattern.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B) and (C), the character type that appears in the switching effect is the same as the character type that appears in the advance notice effect. The displayed character image is displayed larger than the character image displayed in the advance notice effect. Also, the character type that appears in the switching effect and the character type that appears in the advance notice effect are not necessarily the same, and can be changed in various ways.

In the switching effect, the display time tg1 from the start of display of one of the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 to the switching display of another character image is 1000 ms. Then, the display time tf1 from the start of display of one of the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 to the switching display to another character image is 3000 ms. Further, the display color of each of the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 is gold in the switching effect, whereas it is normal color (for example, white) in the advance notice effect.

In this way, the period tg1 from when one character image is displayed in the switching effect to when it is switched to another character image is the period tg1 after one character image is displayed in the advance notice effect and when it is switched to another character image. is shorter than the period th1. That is, the switching effect is not executed in super reach α1 and α2, but is effect performed in super reach β1 and β2 which have a higher expectation of big hit than super reach α1 and α2. By performing the game quickly, it is possible to improve the expectation for the big win.

In the characterizing portion 175SG, the display time tf1 of the character image in the notice effect and the display time tg1 of the character image in the switching effect are exemplified in a form in which the display time tg1 is shorter than the display time tf1 for all character types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and regarding the display time of at least one character image among the plurality of types of character images 175SG001 to 175SG003, the display time tg1 in the switching effect is the display time of the character image in the advance notice effect. It should be shorter than the time tf1. Further, the display times tf1 and tg1 of the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 may be different as long as the display time tg1 in the switching effect is shorter than the character image display time tf1 in the announcement effect.

(Last half of the battle production)
In the latter half of the battle production, after the movable body production is executed in the normal reach production, it is executed through the reach title production that informs the developing super reach type, and finally the battle between the characters A to C and the enemy character. , this is an effect for informing whether or not the characters A to C will defeat the enemy character. When the variable display result is a big hit, an effect is executed in which the characters A to C win over the enemy character and the variable display result is a big win, and when the variable display result is a loss, the character A is displayed. An effect is executed in which ∼C is defeated by the enemy character and the result of the variable display is notified that the result is a failure.

Although the details of the latter half of the battle production are not shown, the characters A to C attack the enemy character by the types displayed in the latter production. As shown in FIG. 11-9(B), in the case of super reach α1, a super reach effect A is executed in which the ally character A performs an attack of "strong attack!" In the case of , a super reach effect B is executed in which the ally character B attacks with the ``Super Attack!'' A super reach effect C that attacks "Ultra Attack!" A ready-to-win effect D is executed.

In addition, the type of the super ready-to-win effect A to D to be executed and the degree of expectation for winning the battle (expectation for big hit) are notified after the end of the movable body effect and before any of the super ready-to-win effect A to D is started. The ready-to-win title effect (see FIGS. 11-6(H) and 11-7(H)) is executed. Specifically, character images 175SG020 representing the types of super ready-to-win effects A to D, an image 175SG021 representing the degree of expectation for victory in a battle (expectation for a big hit), and character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 representing the types of characters that perform battles. , is displayed. In addition, the image 175SG021 representing the degree of expectation of winning the battle (expectation of jackpot) is displayed by the number of stars (for example, 5 levels from 1 to 5), and the higher the number of stars, the higher the degree of expectation of jackpot. .

As shown in FIG. 11-9 (B), super reach α1, α2, β1, and β2 have the highest jackpot expectations for super reach β2, super reach β2, super reach β1, super reach α2, and super reach α1. Since the super ready-to-win performances A to D are set to be higher in order, the degree of expectation for a big hit is highest in the super ready-to-win performance D, and is higher in the order of super ready-to-win performance D, super ready-to-reach performance C, super ready-to-reach performance B, and super ready-to-reach performance A. is set.

In addition, the execution period from the start to the end of the ready-to-win title effect is td1 for the ready-to-reach title A that notifies the execution of the super ready-to-win effect A, td2 to the ready-to-win title B to notify the execution of the super ready-to-win effect B, and super ready-to-win. The ready-to-reach title C that informs execution of the effect C is td3, and the ready-to-reach title D that informs the execution of the super ready-to-win effect D is td4. td1 and td2 have the same period, and td3 and td4 have the same period. be. Also, the execution periods td3 and td4 of the reach titles C and D corresponding to the super reach β1 and β2 are set longer than the execution periods td1 and td2 of the reach titles A and B corresponding to the super reach α1 and α2. (td1=td2<td3=td4).

The execution period from the start to the end of the super ready-to-win effect is te1 for the super ready-to-win effect A, te2 for the super ready-to-win effect B, te3 for the super ready-to-win effect C, and te4 for the super ready-to-win effect D. te2 has the same period, and te3 and te4 have the same period. Also, the execution periods te3 and te4 of the super reach performances C and D corresponding to the super reach performances β1 and β2 are set longer than the execution periods te1 and te2 of the super reach performances A and B corresponding to the super reach performances α1 and α2. (te1=te2<te3=te4).

(display screen, sound, light output level)
As described above, in super reach α1, α2, β1, and β2, the battle first half production is started in the normal reach production, and after the shutter production or blackout production makes it difficult to recognize the battle first half production, the first stage production and the switching production are performed. (None for super reach α1 and α2), the latter stage effect and the movable body effect are executed.

As shown in FIG. 11-9(A), in the first half of the battle production, the lightness (brightness) of the display screen of the image display device 5, the output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (speech and effect sound), The brightness of the various LEDs is set to an intermediate level (ML). The output sound from 8R and the brightness of various LEDs decrease from the middle level (ML) to the lowest level (LL), resulting in a quieter effect.

Next, when the pre-stage effect is started, the brightness of the display screen of the image display device 5, the output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the brightness levels of various LEDs rise to a level slightly lower than the middle level (ML). Furthermore, the display, sound, and light output levels increase step by step during the execution period of the switching effect, and from the latter stage effect to the movable object effect, the display, sound, and light output levels rise to the maximum level (HL). As a result, the production becomes lively. After that, each output level returns to the medium level (ML) when it develops into super reach.

In the above, when the first half of the battle production is executed, in the case of the normal reach fluctuation pattern, the battle is not carried over to the second half, and the victory or defeat is produced, while in the case of the super reach fluctuation pattern, the battle is carried over to the second half. different. At this time, the shutter effect and blackout effect make it difficult to recognize the effect of the first half of the battle that is being executed. It is possible to suitably liven up the production by

In this way, in the normal reach effect, the shutter effect or blackout effect makes it difficult to recognize the effect in the first half of the battle. As the output level rises step by step, the performance is enhanced step by step, so that the player's expectation for the execution of any one of the super ready-to-win performances A to D can be increased step by step. .

(Effect)
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 175SG, it is possible to control the jackpot game state that is advantageous for the player, and the effect control CPU 120 controls normal reach of super reach α1, α2, β1, β2. In the effects, a shutter effect, a blackout effect, a pre-stage effect (first information display effect) for displaying first information composed of a first number of information, and an effect that can be executed after the pre-stage effect and the first number a post-stage effect (second information display effect) of displaying second information composed of a second number of information different from the The first information can be divided into a plurality of pieces of information and displayed sequentially in the former stage presentation, and the second information can be divided into a plurality of pieces of information and displayed sequentially in the latter stage presentation. In addition, the number of characters displayed in the first period th1 and the second period th2 of the pre-stage effect is larger than the number of characters displayed in the first predetermined period th3 and the second predetermined period th4 of the post-stage effect.
According to this feature, the second information has a smaller amount of information than the first information and is displayed in an emphasized manner, so that a sense of anticipation for being controlled to a big win game state by the front stage performance and the rear stage performance is heightened. It can be improved step by step. More specifically, displaying information with a small number of characters in a large size rather than displaying information with a large number of characters in a small size makes it possible to display information in a more emphasized manner, so that the presentation can be enhanced step by step.

In addition, a mode (for example, a fade-out mode) when the display of the first information is finished in the preceding stage effect, and a mode (for example, a frame-out mode) when the display of the second information is finished in the second information display effect ) is different.
According to this feature, the first information and the second information have different modes when the display ends, so that the expectation for the control to the big win game state is improved step by step by the front-stage performance and the rear-stage performance. can be done.

In addition, a mode (for example, fade-in mode) when the display of the first information is started in the pre-stage production and a mode (for example, the frame-in mode) when the display of the second information is started in the post-stage production. different.
According to this feature, since the first information and the second information are displayed in different modes when the display is started, it is possible to gradually increase the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state by the preceding stage effect and the latter stage effect. can.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs a switching effect of switching and displaying the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 (specific images) corresponding to a plurality of types of characters A to C after the first stage effect and before starting the second stage effect. It is viable.
According to this feature, the switching performance for switching and displaying the character image is executed before shifting from the front stage performance to the rear stage performance, so that the expectation for the control to the big win game state is improved step by step. can be done.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the super ready-to-win effects A to D, and can execute the ready-to-win title effects A to D as notification effects for notifying that the super ready-to-win effect will be executed after the latter stage effect. . According to this feature, it is possible to raise expectations for the super ready-to-win effects A to D.

Further, the execution periods td1 to td4 of the reach title effect are shorter than the execution period tb1 of the pre-stage effect and the execution period tc1 of the post-stage effect. According to this feature, it is possible to suppress redundant notification effects while improving expectations for the super ready-to-win effects A to D.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sequentially displays a plurality of character images 175SG008 (for example, "mi", "la", "ku", "ru") consisting of one character from the right side of the display screen toward the center during the first predetermined period th3. Since it is possible to display (dynamically display) as if moving while rotating (frame-in), the production effect can be improved.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 makes the output levels of display, sound, and light higher in the latter stage performance than in the former stage performance, so that the former stage performance and the latter stage performance can be stepped up.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 175SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls the normal reach effect in super reach α1, α2, β1, β2, shutter effect and blackout effect, super reach effect A, B and the super reach It is possible to execute super ready-to-win performances C, D suggesting that the ratio of control to the big win game state is higher than when performances A, B are executed, switching performances, and advance notice performances A to C, After starting the shutter effect or the blackout effect, after lowering the output levels of the display, sound and light, the switching effect is executed in the case of super reach β1 and β2.
According to this feature, when the super ready-to-win effects C and D are executed, the character images A to D are displayed after a predetermined period of time during which the predetermined image is made invisible by the blackout effect and the output of sound and light is suppressed. By executing the switching effect of switching and displaying C, it is possible to gradually improve the expectation for being controlled to the big winning game state.

Further, in the switching effect, the display period tg1 from when one character image is displayed to when it is switched to another character image is the display period tg1 after one character image is displayed in the advance notice effects A to C and the other character image is displayed. It is shorter than the display period tf1 until the image is switched and displayed.
According to this feature, when the super ready-to-win effects C and D are executed, after a predetermined period of time during which the predetermined image is made invisible by the blackout effect and the output of sound and light is suppressed, the advance notice effects A to D are performed. By executing the switching effect of switching and displaying the character image faster than C, the expectation for being controlled to the big win game state can be improved step by step.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can switch and display a character image that is larger than the character images in the advance notice effects A to C in the switching effect. According to this feature, by executing the switching performance of switching and displaying character images larger than the notice performances A to C, it is possible to gradually improve the expectation of being controlled to the big win game state. .

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a shutter effect in which the sound output is reduced in the first period, and a blackout effect in which the sound output is reduced in the second period longer than the first period. To execute a blackout performance before performance is executed.
According to this feature, the period in which the predetermined image is made invisible by the blackout effect and the output of sound and light is suppressed may be short or long, and the expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state. can be suitably improved.

In addition, since the super reach β1 and β2 in which the blackout effect is executed has a higher expectation of a big hit than the super reach α1 and α2 in which the shutter effect is executed, during the period in which the output of sound and light is suppressed can draw attention.

Further, the plurality of types of specific images in the switching effect include at least a first specific image and a second specific image similar in form to the first specific image (for example, a small image, a medium image, and a large image. 13 (I) to (L)), one character image is changed by switching and displaying, so the presentation effect is improved.

In addition, the blank image 175SG010 and the large images of the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 are displayed in blue, and the small and medium images of the character images 175SG001 to 175SG003 are displayed in gold. It becomes easy to understand the switching between.

Also, the execution periods te3 and te4 of the super reach performances C and D corresponding to the super reach performances β1 and β2 are set longer than the execution periods te1 and te2 of the super reach performances A and B corresponding to the super reach performances α1 and α2. (te1=te2<te3=te4), it is possible to suppress super ready-to-win effects A and B from becoming redundant even though the switching effect is not executed.

(Characteristic part 175SG modification 1)
Next, modification 1 of the characteristic portion 175SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-14. FIGS. 11-14 are timing charts showing an example of the effect operation of super reach in modification 1 of characteristic portion 175SG (A) and (B).

In the above-described embodiment, the display, sound, and light output levels in the normal reach performance in super reach α1, α2, β1, and β2 are stepped up at multiple timings, as shown in FIG. 11-9(A). , but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. During the period from the start of the pre-stage presentation to the end of the post-stage presentation, it may be gradually increased. In addition, the output levels of display, sound, and light do not necessarily have to rise to the maximum level in the latter stage effect.

In addition, during the period from the start of the shutter effect or blackout effect to the start of the pre-stage effect, the output levels of the display, sound, and light were lowered to the lowest level, but for example, the sound may be silenced. However, music may be reproduced at a volume of a predetermined level (for example, the lowest level). Also, in the pre-stage production and the post-stage production, the voice of the lines may be output while playing back the music.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the display, sound, and light output levels are illustrated as being lowered to an intermediate level with the start of the super reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the latter stage effect You can move to the super reach effect while maintaining the level raised in , or if you do not rise to the maximum level in the later stage effect, you can move to the super reach effect and then increase the level further. good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in response to the difficulty in recognizing the first half of the battle due to the shutter effect or the blackout effect, the output levels of the display, sound, and light are lowered to the minimum level, and then with the passage of time. Although the form in which the output level rises step by step to boost the effect step by step has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. In the case of executing a fanning effect or the like suggesting the execution of the movable body effect before performing the effect, for example, the movable body 32 may be operated in accordance with the output level of at least one of display, sound, and light. .

Specifically, when the movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the second position via the first position in the movable body production, in the preceding stage production before the movable body production, the movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the first position. position at a low speed, and in the latter performance, the movable body 32 is reciprocated between the origin position and the first position at a higher speed than in the former performance, and in the movable body performance, the movable body 32 is moved to the second position. move to position. In this way, by increasing the motion speed of the movable body 32 step by step, the performance may be enhanced step by step.

In addition, although an embodiment in which the moving speed of the movable body 32 is increased stepwise has been exemplified here, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the moving speed, the moving distance, and the number of operations of the movable body 32 If one is made to increase step by step, production can be livened up step by step.

In addition, when executing other effects such as the movable body effects in parallel with the preceding stage effect and the latter stage effect, for example, at least one of the display, sound, and light output levels is output in accordance with the other effect. However, the other levels may be output in accordance with the pre-stage presentation or the post-stage presentation.

(Characteristic part 175SG modified example 2)
Next, modification 2 of characteristic portion 175SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-15. 11 to 15, (A) is an explanatory diagram showing example 1 of special effect, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing example 2 of special effect.

The shutter effect, which is a special effect that makes it difficult to recognize the effect being executed, has exemplified a form in which the displayed display image is made difficult to see by displaying the shutter image 175SG006, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the variable display mode becomes the reach display mode as shown in FIG. 11-15(A), the shutter image 175SG006 is displayed as shown in FIGS. Alternatively, it may be possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the variable display image of the decorative pattern by performing display in a mode in which the effect image 175SG030 that cuts through the display screen is increased.

In addition to the above, the effect image that makes it difficult to visually recognize the display image as described above includes a effect image that is different in form from the variable display image of the decorative pattern that is being displayed, and a movable object that imitates the movable body 32 and the like. It may be a moving image in which a body image falls, a moving image in which the glass covering the display screen is broken, a moving image in which stones, coins, etc. are stacked, etc., and can be changed in various ways. .

In addition, the blackout effect of the above-described embodiment exemplifies a form in which the displayed image is made difficult to recognize by turning the display screen into a black screen state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (D), after the variable display mode becomes the reach display mode, the display screen is gradually changed to a white screen as shown in FIGS. The display image may be made difficult to see by changing it, or by fading out or framing out the displayed image.

(Characteristic part 175SG modified example 3)
Next, modification 3 of characteristic portion 175SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-16 and 11-17. FIGS. 11-16 (A) to (H) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of super reach as a modified example. Similarly, FIGS. 11-17 are explanatory diagrams (I) to (L) showing an example of the effect operation of super reach as a modified example.

In the above-described embodiment, the front stage effect and the rear stage effect are illustrated as being performed before the movable body effect is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and after the movable body effect is started may be executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-16, the effect control CPU 120 has passed a predetermined time after starting the variable display of decorative symbols in the variable display of super reach α1, α2, β1, and β2. At this time, if execution of the advance notice effect is determined, one of the advance notice effects A to C is executed (see FIG. 11-16(A)). Next, the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is changed to the ready-to-win display mode, and the normal ready-to-win effect is started (see FIG. 11-16(B)).

Next, during execution of the normal reach effect, the blackout effect is executed (see FIG. 11-16(C)), and after the display screen becomes a black screen, the display screen becomes slightly brighter, and then the character image 175SG003 fades in. is displayed (see FIGS. 11-16 (D) and (E)). Next, after the switching effect is executed (see FIG. 11-16 (F)), a character image 175SG040 (for example, “Fierce Fight”) suggesting the degree of expectation of the super reach effect is displayed (FIG. 11-16 (G) (see FIG. 11-16(H)), and the movable body effect is executed (see FIG. 11-16(H)).

After that, the blackout effect is executed again (see FIG. 11-17(I)), and after the display screen is changed to a black screen, the display screen becomes slightly brighter, and then the character image 175SG003 and the character image 175SG007 of the preceding lines are displayed. 11-17(J)), and then the character image 175SG008 of the latter dialogue is displayed and the latter stage effect is executed (see FIG. 11-17(K)). Then, it develops into a super ready-to-win effect, and a ready-to-win title effect is executed (see FIG. 11-17(L)).

Although the characteristic portion 175SG in the embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and changes and additions may be made without departing from the gist of the present invention. is also included in the present invention.

(description of variations and applications)
In addition, in the characteristic portion 175SG, as an information display effect suggesting that information is displayed to be controlled to an advantageous state, a form in which information consisting of characters as lines of a character image is applied has been exemplified, but the present invention. is not limited to this, and the information may include not only letters but also at least one of numerals, symbols, patterns, patterns, etc., as long as the information can be displayed.

In addition, the information is not limited to that composed of a plurality of character information that constitutes a line, but any displayable information that suggests control in an advantageous state can be made from a series of lines or sentences. It does not have to be information consisting of a word or a single character or number.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 175SG, the information display effect has been exemplified by a form composed of a front stage effect (first information display effect) and a rear stage effect (second information display effect), but the present invention is limited to this. It may be composed of three or more effects instead of one. Further, the content of the second information displayed in the second information display effect may not follow the content of the first information displayed in the first information display effect as in the above embodiment. For example, the information may be information with contents different from the first information.

Further, in the characterizing section 175SG, the number of characters of the second information (second number) is less than the number of characters of the first information (first number), but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of characters in the first information and the second information may be the same, or the second number in the second information may be greater than the first number in the first information. Also, the display mode of the first information and the display mode of the second information may be different or the same.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 175SG, as a special effect of switching and displaying a plurality of types of specific images, a switching effect of switching and displaying a plurality of types of character images appearing in the super ready-to-win effect and advance notice effects A to C are applied. Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be an image different from the character image, and can be arbitrarily changed. For example, an image related to each type of super reach is preferably

In addition, the switching effect has been exemplified by a form in which a common mode of effect can be executed in super reach β1 and β2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and super reach β1 and super reach β2, that is, , the switching display mode may differ according to the type of super reach.

In addition, in the characteristic part 175SG, the super ready-to-win performances A and B are applied as the first specific performance suggesting that the game state is controlled to the big win game state, and the big win game state is reached more than when the first specific performance is executed. Although the form in which the super reach C and D are applied as the second specific effect suggesting that the control ratio is high, the present invention is not limited to this, and the control to the jackpot game state is performed. A super ready-to-win performance C is applied as a suggesting first specific performance, and a super ready-to-win performance D is applied as a second specific performance to suggest that the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the first specific performance is executed. may apply.

Further, in the characterizing portion 175SG, a form in which the super reach α1, α2, β1, and β2 in which the front stage production and the rear stage production are executed has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the front stage production is performed. , or other types of super reach in which the latter stage effect is not executed may be made executable.

Further, in the characterizing section 175SG, the form in which the front stage effect and the rear stage effect can be executed only by super reach has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be executed by normal reach or non-reach. may In addition, it may be possible to execute the performance during the big hit, which is different from the performance during the variable display.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 175SG, as a pachinko game machine, a so-called 1 type 2 that can be controlled to a big win game state by generating a V prize triggered by a small win in a short time state after the end of the big win A or B big win game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game characteristics can be changed variously as long as the game machine is capable of generating super reach. A so-called pachinko game machine or the like that can be controlled to a variable probability state after completion may be applied.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 or the like is exemplified as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. While the number of balls enclosed in a circulative manner inside the machine and lent out in response to a player's request for lending and the number of prize balls given according to winning are added, the number of game balls used in the game is increased. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which the amount is subtracted and stored. Since scores and points are given to the player instead of game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines, slot machines, etc., in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Also, the gaming machine capable of playing a game is at least one that performs a game, and is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, and may be a general gaming machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Effect control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect of displaying a predetermined image and outputting a sound of a predetermined volume;
a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect that makes the predetermined image difficult to see;
an information display effect executing means capable of executing an information display effect suggesting that the information is controlled to the advantageous state by displaying the information during the variable display of 1 and after the special effect;
with
The information display effect is
a first information display effect for displaying first information composed of a first number of information;
a second information display effect that can be executed after the first information display effect and displays second information composed of a second number of information different from the first number;
including
The first information and the second information are information that is not displayed during a period from the start of the variable display to the execution of the special effect during the variable display, and the second information is the information that is the second information. Information that is not displayed during the display of 1 information,
The information display effect executing means
The second information can be displayed in a display mode with a higher degree of emphasis than the display mode of the first information,
The first information can be divided into a plurality of pieces of information and displayed sequentially in the first information display effect, and the second information can be divided into a plurality of pieces of information and displayed sequentially in the second information display effect,
the second number is less than the first number;
a mode of erasing the first information when ending the display of the first information in the first information display effect; and a mode of erasing the first information when ending the display of the second information in the second information display effect. Different from the erasing mode when erasing the second information,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images